Released in August 2012,this 462 page manual gives you the concise lowdown on this incredible system for class 7&8 trucks,that we will start seeing more of in the years to come
Released in August 2012,this 462 page manual gives you the concise lowdown on this incredible system for class 7&8 trucks,that we will start seeing more of in the years to come
Released in August 2012,this 462 page manual gives you the concise lowdown on this incredible system for class 7&8 trucks,that we will start seeing more of in the years to come
TRTS2500 August 2012 EH-11NA1206A-PBD 4-Battery PEC Model 4-Battery PEC i Warnings & Cautions Warnings and Cautions Throughout this service manual there are paragraphs that are marked with a title of DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION. These special paragraphs contain specific safety information and must be read, understood, and heeded before continuing the procedure or performing the step(s). DANGER INDICATES YOU WILL BE SEVERLY INJURED OR KILLED IF DO NOT FOLLOW THE INDICATED PROCEDURE. ! WARNING WARNING INDICATES AN IMMEDIATE HAZARD, WHICH COULD RESULT IN SEVERE PERSONAL INJURY IF YOU DO NOT FOLLOW THE INDICATED PROCEDURE. ! CAUTION CAUTION INDICATES VEHICLE OR PROPERTY DAMAGE COULD OCCUR IF YOU DO NOT FOLLOW THE INDICATED PROCEDURE. Note: NOTE INDICATES ADDITIONAL DETAIL THAT WILL AID IN THE DIAGNOSIS OR REPAIR OF A COMPONENT/SYSTEM. ! WARNING Follow the specified procedures in the indicated order to avoid personal injury: 1. IF THE HIGH-VOLTAGE CONES ARE AROUND THE VEHICLE AND THE LOCKOUT IS INSTALLED ON THE PEC, THE ONLY PERSON THAT SHOULD BE ALLOWED TO START THE VEHICLE IS THE PERSON WHO SIGNED THE LOCKOUT TAG. 2. Before working on a vehicle or leaving the cab while the engine is running you should place the shift lever in N set the parking brake, and block the wheels. 3. For safety reasons, always engage the service brakes prior to selecting gear positions from N. 4. Before starting a vehicle always be seated in the driver's seat, select N on the shift control, and set the parking brakes. 5. When parking the vehicle or leaving the cab you should place the shift lever in N and set the parking brake. 6. In vehicles with ePTO, the engine and/or Motor/Generator can start in ePTO mode. Never perform any maintenance or work on vehicle, while in this mode. 7. 24-volt Battery (+) and (-) must be disconnected prior to any welding on any Hybrid equipped vehicle. ii High-Voltage Warnings & Cautions Warnings & Cautions ! CAUTION Do not release the parking brake or attempt to select a gear until the air pressure is at the correct level. ! CAUTION To avoid damage to the transmission during towing place the shift lever in "N" and lift the drive wheels off the ground or disconnect the driveline. High-Voltage Warnings & Cautions Use CO2 or Dry Chemical Fire Extinguishers. The high-voltage wiring is covered in orange insulation or convoluted tubing and marked with warning labels at the connectors. All Eaton Hybrid Diesel/Electric vehicles will be marked 'Hybrid' on the outside of the vehicle, along with the shift label on the dash. Refer to OEM for specific location of chassis mounted hybrid components. Do NOT cut into the orange high-voltage cables. Do NOT cut into or open the PEC. Do NOT cut into or open the DC/DC converter. Do NOT cut into or open the Inverter. Warning: A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves (class 0 with leather protectors) are required prior to working on high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Warning: The rubber-insulated gloves that must be worn while working on the high-voltage system are class 0 with leather protectors. The rubber gloves must be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing procedure found in the Insulated Rubber Glove Test section. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Warning: Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the High- Voltage Service Shutdown Procedure should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Warning: High-voltage cables and wiring are orange and contain a warning label at the connectors. High-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves (class 0 with leather protectors) must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. iii Table of Contents Warnings & Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i Insulated Rubber Glove Test and High-Voltage Work Area . . . . . . . . . 1 High-Voltage Service Shutdown and Power-Up Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Diagnostic Tools/ Service Publications. 9 Hybrid Diagnostic Procedure . . . . . . . . 11 Hybrid Component & Connector Locations13 Fault Code Retrieval/Clearing. . . . . . . . 17 Fault Code Isolation Procedure Index . 19 Symptom-Driven Diagnostics Index . . 23 Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) . . . . . 25 Hybrid Lamp and Gear Display Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . 27 Power-Up Sequence Test . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Electrical Pretest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Hybrid Electrical Pretest . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Fault Code Isolation Procedures Fault Code 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Fault Code 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Fault Code 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Fault Code 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Fault Code 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Fault Code 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Fault Code 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Fault Code 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Fault Code 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Fault Code 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Fault Code 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Fault Code 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Fault Code 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Fault Code 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Fault Code 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Fault Code 18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Fault Code 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Fault Code 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Fault Code 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Fault Code 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Fault Code 27 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Fault Code 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Fault Code 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Fault Code 34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Fault Code 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Fault Code 36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Fault Code 37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Fault Code 38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Fault Code 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Fault Code 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Fault Code 48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Fault Code 49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Fault Code 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Fault Code 51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Fault Code 52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Fault Code 56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Fault Code 58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 iv Table of Contents Fault Code Isolation Procedures (Continued) Fault Code 59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Fault Code 60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Fault Code 61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Fault Code 63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Fault Code 64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Fault Code 65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Fault Code 66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Fault Code 67 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Fault Code 68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Fault Code 70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Fault Code 71 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Fault Code 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Fault Code 73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Fault Code 74 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Fault Code 75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Fault Code 76 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Fault Code 78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Fault Code 82 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Fault Code 83 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Fault Code 84 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Fault Code 85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Fault Code 88 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Fault Code 89 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Fault Code 95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Fault Code 101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Fault Code 103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Fault Code 105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Fault Code 107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Fault Code 108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Fault Code 110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Fault Code 111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Fault Code 112 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Fault Code 113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Fault Code 114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Fault Code 115 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Fault Code 116 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Fault Code 116 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Fault Code 117 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 Fault Code 166 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Front Box Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Engine Crank Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Hybrid Performance Test. . . . . . . . . . . 423 Gear Engagement Test . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 Wiring Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Connector Pin Description . . . . . . . . . 435 1 Insulated Rubber Glove Test and High-Voltage Work Area Insulated Rubber Glove Test ! WARNING The rubber-insulated gloves that must be worn while working on the high- voltage system are class 0 with leather protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing procedure found in the Diagnostic Tools section. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The insulated rubber gloves that must be worn while working on the high-voltage system are class 0 rated. They must be inspected before each use and must always be worn in conjunction with the leather outer glove. Any hole in the insulated rubber glove is a potential entry point for high-voltage. Roll the glove up from the open end until the lower portion of the glove begins to balloon from the resulting air pressure. If the glove leaks any air it must not be used. The gloves should not be used if they exhibit any signs of wear and tear. The leather gloves must always be worn over the rubber insulating gloves in order to protect them. The rubber insulating gloves must be class 0 and meet all of the American Safety Testing Materials Standards. High-Voltage Work Area Requirements ! WARNING A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves (class 0 with leather protectors) are required prior to working on any high- voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The buffer zone is required only when working on the high-voltage DC or AC systems and is called out both in the High-Voltage Service Shutdown Procedure and the individual repair procedures. Position the vehicle in the service bay. Position four orange cones around the corners of the vehicle to mark off a 1m (3 ft.) perimeter around the vehicle. Do not allow any unauthorized personnel into the buffer zone during repairs involving high- voltage. Only personnel trained for service on the high-voltage system are to be permitted in the buffer zone. 2 Insulated Rubber Glove Test Insulated Rubber Glove Test and High-Volt- 3 High-Voltage Service Shutdown and Power-Up Procedures Warning: A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves (class 0 with leather protectors) are required prior to working on high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Warning: The rubber-insulated gloves that must be worn while working on the high-voltage system are class 0 with leather protectors. The rubber gloves must be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing procedure found in the Insulated Rubber Glove Test section. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Warning: Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the High- Voltage Service Shutdown Procedure must be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Warning: High-voltage rubber insulated gloves (class 0 with leather protectors) must be worn when working on any high- voltage cables. The High-Voltage Service Shutdown Procedure must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Warning: High-voltage cables and wiring are orange and contain a warning label at the connectors. High-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves (class 0 with leather protectors) must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Air Filter Cover Wing Nuts Exhaust Duct PEC Service Switch Access Panel Covers Access Panel Security Screws Low-Voltage 19-Pin Connector Top Cover Air Filter Cover High-Voltage DC Connector to Inverter Air Outlet Access Panel (On side not shown) Cooling Pipes 8 Mounting Holes (Mounting hardware supplied by OEM) Cover Bolts Lifting Eyes Cover Security Screws 4 High-Voltage Service Shutdown and Power- 4-Battery High-Voltage Service Shutdown Procedure 1. Follow High-Voltage Work Area procedure. 2. Locate the red PEC Service Switch on the front of the PEC and push to the Off position. 3. Turn ignition key On. 4. Allow the system to set for a minimum of 5 minutes to discharge high-voltage. 5. Connect ServiceRanger. 6. Select Vehicle Data Monitor from the main menu. 7. Select J1939 HV Battery. 8. Monitor the J1939 HV Battery (Parameter 520323) voltage until it displays 30 volts or less. Note: If after 5 minutes J1939 HV Battery does not display 30 volts or less, contact Roadranger Call Center at 1-800-826-4357. 9. Turn ignition key Off. 10. Proceed to repair or troubleshooting step. Perform the 4-Battery PEC Isolation Procedure before making any internal repairs to the 4-Battery PEC. PEC Service Switch 2 5 6 7 8 5 High-Voltage Service Shutdown and Power-Up Procedures 4-Battery High-Voltage Isolation Procedure 1. After performing the High-Voltage Service Shut-Down Procedure, if removal is necessary, refer to the 4-Battery Power Electronics Carrier (PEC) Removal and Installation procedure in the service manual TRSM2000. 2. Using a 13 mm socket, remove the 14 nuts and lock washers used to secure both access panels. Using a T-27 Plus bit, remove the two security screws and lock washers used to secure the access panels. Remove the access panel and gaskets. 3. Put on high voltage 0 rated gloves and leather protectors. 4. Remove the 4-Battery PEC main fuses by lifting up on each handle and gently pulling each fuse from the socket. Note: There are two main fuses in the 4-Battery PEC. Access Panels Access Panel Security Screws Main Fuses 6 High-Voltage Service Shutdown and Power- 5. Wearing the high voltage 0 rated gloves and leather protectors, pull the battery connections following the sequence in the image below. 6. To complete the 4-Battery PEC High-Voltage Isolation Procedure, it is required to place the access covers back on the 4-Battery PEC. Secure access covers with lock washers and nuts to service the 4-Battery PEC. 7. Proceed to repair or troubleshooting step. 1 2 3 4 7 High-Voltage Service Shutdown and Power-Up Procedures 4-Battery PEC High-Voltage Service Power-Up Procedure 1. Remove both access covers. 2. Put on high voltage 0 rated gloves and leather protectors. 3. Reinstall battery connections following the sequence in the image below. 4. Wearing the high voltage 0 rated gloves and leather protectors, reinstall the two main fuses. 5. Replace both access panel gaskets and reinstall the access panels. Reinstall the 14 lock washers and nuts. Torque to 44-53 in-lb (5-6 Nm). 1 2 3 4 Main Fuses 8 High-Voltage Service Shutdown and Power- 6. Install the two lock washers and security screws. Torque to 44-53 in-lb (5-6 Nm). 7. Install the 4-Battery PEC to the vehicle using proper equipment and safety procedures. Note: The weight of the 4-Battery PEC is 513 lbs (230 kg). 8. Using a 17 mm socket, install the eight OEM supplied mounting bolts, lock washers, and flat washers. Torque fasteners to 43-48 ft-lb (32.5-36.6 Nm). 9. Connect the OEM supplied Low-Voltage 19-Pin Connector onto the 4-Battery PEC. 10. Wearing the high voltage 0 rated gloves and leather protectors, install the High-Voltage DC Connector to the Inverter and lock it into place. 11. Reassemble the cooling pipes. 12. Pull out the red PEC Service Switch to the On position. 13. Start vehicle when appropriate. Access Panels Access Panel Security Screws 9 Diagnostic Tools/ Service Publications Eaton Tools Visit www.Roadranger.com SPX/OTC Tools Contact SPX / OTC at (800) 328-6657 Tool Description ServiceRanger version 3 ServiceRanger PC based Diagnostic Tool Tool Description J-49818 Eaton Hybrid Tool Safety Kit - Basic PPE (Items listed below can be ordered separately) J-48603 High-Voltage Gloves w/leather protectors (1000 volt) J-48605 Hybrid Safety Cones (set of 4) Tool Description J-49819 Eaton Hybrid Tool Safety Kit - Basic Plus PPE (Items listed below can be ordered separately) J-48603 High-Voltage Gloves w/leather protectors (1000 volt) J-48605 Hybrid Safety Cones (set of 4) J-48907 Orange Magnetic Sign J-48608 Hybrid Non-Conductive Safety Pole J-48908 Glove Bag 10 Eaton Tools Diagnostic Tools/ Service Publications J-48893 - Hybrid PPE / Service Tool Kit (includes J-49819 kit and items from Miscellaneous Service Tools highlighted with *) Service Publications Visit www.Roadranger.com Tool Description Misc. Service Tools Items listed below are ordered separately J-48624 Nexiq USB-Link Communication Adapter J-43318-A* Pin Adapter Kit - Interface Harness Diagnostics J-48735* Alignment Pins - Hybrid Motor/Gen to Transmission Main Case J-49111* Clutch Alignment Tool J-46708* Fluke Digital Multimeter J-48505 Input Shaft Turning Socket J-48507 Lifting Fixture - Power Electronics Carrier J-48502 Jack Adapter Plate - Hybrid Drive Unit 5019 Transmission Jack - Low Lift 5078 Transmission Jack - High Lift J-48577 Engine/Transmission Stand Adapter Plate - Hybrid Drive Unit J-29109-A Engine/Transmission Stand - 6000 lb. Rating TRSM2000 Service Manual (covers external components on transmission and Hybrid components) TRSM0110 Service Manual (covers internal transmission repairs only) TRTS2500 Troubleshooting Guide TRDR1000 Driver Instructions TRDR1110 First Responder Guide 11 Hybrid Diagnostic Procedure Hybrid Diagnostic Procedure Key ON Retrieve Active Faults with ServiceRanger. Active Codes Yes Go to "Fault Code Isolation Procedure Index" No Does Gear Display Show an "N" Does Engine Crank No Yes No Go to "Engine Crank Test" Yes If equipped, does vehicle operate normal in ePTO mode? No Go to "ePTO Test Yes If a mode other than neutral is selected does transmission engage a gear? NOTE: Service Brake must be applied prior to selecting a gear. No Go to "Gear Engagement Test if solid N is displayed Go to Front Box Test is flashing gear number is displayed Yes Is vehicle acceleration performance acceptable No Go to "Hybrid Performance Test" Yes Clear faults and operate vehicle based on customers concern Inactive Faults = Go to "Product Diagnostic Mode" Active Faults = Go to "Fault Isolation Procedure Index" No Fault = Test Complete Is Red "Stop Hybrid" or Amber Check Hybrid lamp blinking? Yes No Go to Hybrid Lamp Gear Display Description Go to Hybrid Lamp and Gear Display description Go to Gear Engagement Test Will vehicle move from a stop? Yes No 12 Hybrid Diagnostic Procedure 13 Hybrid Component & Connector Locations Transmission Wiring Connections Hybrid Control Module (HCM) Left: 38-Way System Connector Right: 38-Way Vehicle Connector Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) Left: 38-Way Vehicle Connector Right: 38-Way System Connector Electronic Clutch Actuator Top: 3-Way Connector Bottom: 8-Way Connector Output Shaft Speed Sensor Rail Position Sensor 14 Transmission Wiring Connections Hybrid Component & Connector Locations
Gear Position Sensor High-Voltage 3-Way AC Connector Motor/Generator Resolver Connector Motor/Generator Temperature Connector Input Shaft Speed Sensor Transmission Diagnostic Port 15 Hybrid Component & Connector Locations Component Wiring Connections Component Wiring Connections 24V DC(-) High Voltage DC Connector Top: DC(-) Bottom: (DC(+) Test Port Connection (Not used) OEM Connection DC/DC Converter HIgh Voltage 3-Way AC Connector Low Voltage 40-Way Connector High-Voltage DC Connector to PEC Inverter Coolant Ports 24V DC(+) (-) (+) Coolant Port Inlet Coolant Port Outlet 16 Component Wiring Connections Hybrid Component & Connector Locations Air Filter Cover Wing Nuts Exhaust Duct PEC Service Switch Access Panel Covers Access Panel Security Screws Low-Voltage 19-Pin Connector Top Cover Air Filter Cover High-Voltage DC Connector to Inverter Air Outlet Access Panel (On side not shown) Cooling Pipes 8 Mounting Holes (Mounting hardware supplied by OEM) Cover Bolts Lifting Eyes Power Electronics Carrier (PEC) Cover Security Screws 17 Fault Code Retrieval/Clearing All Eaton Hybrid systems require the use of ServiceRanger for all diagnostics. To view fault codes or clear them follow the procedures below. View Active and Inactive Faults 1. Connect ServiceRanger to the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Go to the Tools menu and select the Communication tab. 3. Select the appropriate communication device for J1587 and J1939. 4. Select Connect on the main page. 5. Select the View Fault Codes tab. Note: Initial use requires all steps, however subsequent uses require only steps 4 and 5. Clear Inactive Faults 1. Connect ServiceRanger to the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Go to the Tools menu and select the Communication tab. 3. Select the appropriate communication device for J1587 and J1939. 4. Select Connect on the main page. 5. Select the View Fault Codes tab. 6. Select the Clear Faults button. Note: Initial use requires all steps, however subsequent uses require only steps 4 and 5. 18 Fault Code Retrieval/Clearing 19 Fault Code Isolation Procedure Index Index Fault Code SPN FMI Description Page Number 1 520225 0,6,15 Motor/Generator Current Sensor page 41 2 520226 3 Motor/Generator Temperature Sensor page 47 3 520227 0 Motor/Generator Temperature page 53 4 520228 0,2, 21-27 Motor/Generator Rotation Speed Sensor page 61 5 520229 21-29 Motor/Generator AC Cable page 67 6 629 13 No ECU Operation (HCM) page 75 7 629 13 Improper ECU Configuration (HCM) page 77 8 158 4 Loss of Switched Ignition Power Fault (HCM) page 79 9 168 14 Weak Battery Voltage (HCM) page 83 10 168 4 Low Battery Voltage (HCM) page 87 11 629 12 No ECU Operation (TECU) page 91 12 629 13 Improper ECU Configuration (TECU) page 93 14 751 2, 3, 4 Invalid Shifter Range page 95 16 625 2 High Integrity Link (HIL) page 99 17 626 3, 4 Start Enable Relay page 105 18 520200 2, 9 ECA Communication page 111 19 520273 2, 9 CAN ECA Message page 115 22 563 2, 9, 14 J1939 ABS Message (HCM) page 119 24 525 9 J1939 HCM Message (TECU) page 123 26 522 10 Clutch Slip page 127 27 788 7, 14 Clutch Disengagement page 131 32 43 2 Loss of Switched Ignition Power (TECU) page 135 33 168 4 Low Battery Voltage (TECU) page 139 34 168 14 Weak Battery Voltage (TECU) page 143 35 639 2 J1939 Communication Link page 147 36 639 14 J1939 Engine Message (TECU) page 153 37 610 5 Power Supply (TECU) page 155 38 520243 3, 4, 5, 14 Battery Fan Relay page 161 39 520247 3, 4, 5 Heat Exchanger Relay page 167 40 520248 3, 4, 5, 14 Cooling Pump Relay page 173 48 523 2, 9 J1939 Transmission Message (HCM) page 179 49 190 2, 9 J1939 Engine Message (HCM) page 183 20 Index Fault Code Isolation Procedure Index 50 701 2, 9 J1939 Body Controller Message (HCM) page 185 51 60 2, 3, 4, 10 Rail Position Sensor page 187 52 59 2, 3, 4 Gear Position Sensor page 191 56 161 2,3,4, 5,10 Input Shaft Speed Sensor page 197 58 191 2, 3, 4, 5 Output Shaft Speed Sensor page 201 59 639 2, 9 J1939 Communication Link (HCM) page 205 60 625 2, 9 CAN Communication Link (HCM) page 211 61 772 5, 6 Rail Select Motor page 215 63 773 5, 6 Gear Select Motor page 219 64 788, 520198, 520199, 524035 0, 12, 13, 21-28 ECA page 223 65 520203 2, 5 ECA Speed Sensor page 227 66 520271 3, 4, 14 ECA Battery Voltage page 233 67 520274 3, 4, 5 ECA Ignition Voltage page 237 68 520231 12, 13, 14 Grade Sensor page 243 70 188, 518, 539, 544 0, 1, 2, 7 Engine Failed to Respond (HCM) page 247 71 520275 7 Failed to Disengage Gear page 249 72 520277 7 Failed to Select Rail page 253 73 520278 7 Failed to Engage Gear page 257 74 93, 190 7 Engine Failed to Respond (TECU) page 261 75* 520276 14 Power Down In Gear page 263 76 520250 3, 4, 16,18 High-Voltage Battery Potential Voltage page 265 78 520232 6 High-Voltage Battery Current page 269 82 520233 0,16 High-Voltage Battery Temperature page 273 83 751 12, 13 Invalid Shifter Range page 279 84 751 13 Shift Control Device Not Configured page 285 85 639 12 Shift Control Device Incompatible page 293 88 520223 2, 9 Inverter CAN Message (HCM) page 299 89 520234 2, 9 BCU CAN Message (HCM) page 303 95 520249 3, 4 24-volt Cranking Relay page 309 101 520238 0, 22-31 High-Voltage Battery page 315 103 520265 22-26 Battery Control Unit Communication page 319 105 520240 22-30 Battery Control Unit page 325 107 520242 1 High-Voltage Battery Leak Detection page 331 108 520268 3, 4 Battery Control Unit Power Supply page 347 Fault Code SPN FMI Description Page Number 21 Fault Code Isolation Procedure Index Index 110 520220 21-29 Inverter page 353 111 520260 12 - 28 Inverter Communication page 357 112 520221 3, 4 Inverter Voltage page 363 113 520222 6, 14 Inverter Current page 369 114 520261 3, 4 Inverter Power Supply page 375 115 520223 0 Inverter Temperature page 381 116 521210, 521211, 521212 3, 4, 5 High-Voltage Relays page 387 116 520224 10, 14, 20 High-Voltage Relays page 395 117 520251 3, 14, 29 BCU Relay Cut Request page 405 Fault Code SPN FMI Description Page Number 22 Index Fault Code Isolation Procedure Index 23 Symptom-Driven Diagnostics Index Index Symptom Isolation Procedure Page Number Power-up no crank and Gear Display shows a - Front Box Test page 413 Power-up no crank and Gear Display shows a N Engine Crank Test page 419 Power-up no crank and Gear Display shows - -, **, or blank Power Up Sequence Test page 29 Power-up vehicle cranks and Gear Display shows --, **, or blank Refer to OEM for gear display issue Vehicle acceleration performance is not acceptable Hybrid Performance Test page 423 Transmission will not engage a gear from neutral and warning tone sounds (solid N in gear display) Gear Engagement Test page 427 Transmission will not move from a stop (solid gear number in gear display) Gear Engagement Test page 427 Transmission will not engage a gear from neutral (flashing gear number in gear display) Front Box Test page 413 Red Service lamp on the push button shift control is on/blinking Fault Code Retrieval and Clearing page 17 Amber Check Hybrid lamp on the dash is on Fault Code Retrieval and Clearing page 17 Red Stop Hybrid lamp on the dash is on Fault Code Retrieval and Clearing page 17 24 Symptom-Driven Diagnostics Index 25 Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) is used to help diagnose inactive codes that may have been set during normal driving. This diagnostic mode increases the sensitivity of the fault sensing capabilities. This procedure tests loose, degraded, and intermittent connections. Use the active fault isolation procedure to guide you to the wiring and connectors that are associated with the inactive fault codes. Flex the wiring harness and connectors and attempt to recreate the fault after activating (PDM). PDM is only to be used by a trained service technician in an authorized dealer. To enter PDM mode Note: The vehicle will not start in Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM). You must turn vehicle key OFF and allow the system to power down to exit PDM. 1. Vehicle must be stationary, engine must not be running, vehicle parking brake must be set. 2. Connect ServiceRanger to the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 3. Select the View Fault Codes screen. 4. Perform two key clicks of the ignition switch starting in the ON position and ending in the ON position Note: An 88 may show up in the dash at key on, which is a normal power-up test of the display. 5. The gear display will flash a solid PD (Product Diagnostic Mode) and the mode will be activated. 6. Flex the wiring harness and connectors and attempt to recreate the fault. 7. If a fault becomes active during PDM, ServiceRanger will display the fault with a status of active. 8. If a fault is detected, exit PDM mode and perform the corresponding Fault Isolation Procedure page 11. Note: Active codes set during PDM mode will not be stored as inactive. 9. To exit PDM mode, power the system down by turning the key to the OFF position. PDM will only work with the following inactive codes 9, 10, 14, 16, 17, 18, 19, 22, 24, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 38, 39, 40, 48, 49, 50, 51, 52, 56, 58, 59, 60, 61, 63, 76, 87, 88, 89, 95 26 Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) is used to help diagnose inactive codes that may have 27 Hybrid Lamp and Gear Display Descriptions All Eaton Hybrid systems use a combination of three lamps to indicate failures of different operating systems and the ability of the vehicle to drive. These lamps include the red Service lamp, amber Check Hybrid lamp, and the red Stop Hybrid lamp. The details for each lamp are included below. Red Service Lamp 1. This lamp is located on the Push Button Shift Control and reads SERVICE. 2. This lamp is turned on and off by the Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) for Automated Transmissions faults over the High Integrity Link (HIL). 3. This lamp also comes on momentarily at key on then goes out as part of the TECU self-test. Amber Check Hybrid Lamp 1. This lamp is located near the middle of the dash. The lamp is amber and contains wording below stating Check Hybrid. 2. This lamp is turned on and off indirectly by the Hybrid Control Module (HCM) and directly by the Body Controller over J1939. 3. This lamp is turned on when a Hybrid system fault is active. 4. When the amber lamp is on, the vehicle can still be driven, however, the vehicle may operate without Hybrid electric assist. Red Stop Hybrid Lamp 1. This lamp is located near the middle of the dash. The lamp is red and contains wording below stating Stop Hybrid. 2. This lamp is turned on and off indirectly by the Hybrid Control Module (HCM) and directly by the Body Controller over J1939. 3. This lamp is turned on when a Hybrid system fault is active. 4. When the red lamp is on, the vehicle should not be driven. Have the vehicle towed or trailered to the OEM truck dealership. Blinking amber Check Hybrid Lamp 1. The majority of vehicles have a red stop switch on the front of the Power Electronics Carrier (PEC). If this switch is pushed in, the amber Check Hybrid lamp will blink. To reset, pull the switch out and turn the key off for 2 minutes. If the lamp remains on, go to the Hybrid Diagnostic Procedure on page 11 and start with step 3 Retrieve Active Faults with ServiceRanger. You should have an active Fault Code 76 FMI 4, or Fault Code 116, FMI 10. Continue to the diagnostic test for the fault that is currently active. ST in Gear Display 1. A ST in the gear display indicates a driver trigger Snapshot was recorded. Snapshot is a diagnostic tool that is used to capture specific data at the time of a fault. It is triggered through two different means listed below. a. Fault code triggered - Specific faults will trigger the HCM or TECU to capture a Snapshot file for later retrieval. This method will not display and ST in the gear display. b. Driver triggered - If the driver chooses to capture a Snapshot of an event he needs to decide if he wants TECU or HCM data. To capture a TECU Snapshot select, Low and the up button twice. To capture a HCM Snapshot select, Drive or Low and the up button and the down button. 28 Hybrid Lamp and Gear Display Descriptions PD in Gear Display 1. A PD in the gear display indicates the TECU and HCM are in a special diagnostic mode called Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM). For more details on the mode and its operation see the Product Diagnostic Mode on page 25. CA in Gear Display 1. A CA in the gear display indicates the HCM is detecting a clutch abuse situation. If the vehicle detects a clutch abuse situation it will first tone the Push Button Shift Control and flash a CA in the gear display. If the clutch abuse situation continues, the Hybrid system will only allow an electric only launch in addition to continuing the tone and the CA. If the clutch abuse continues, while driving the Hybrid system will open the clutch once vehicle speed is below 5mph and allow the clutch to cool. OS in Gear Display 1. A OS in the gear display indicates the HCM is detecting a motor overspeed situation. The vehicle will upshift in Drive and Low automatically, however, if the user is in Manual they perform the upshift unless the vehicle is close to the motor overspeed. If the vehicle is descending a long steep grade in top gear, the driver may see an OS indicating he needs to depress the service brake pedal to slow the vehicle. The HCM will normally shift the vehicle or reduce torque to prevent the motor from going overspeed. F in Gear Display 1. A F in the gear display indicates the TECU has detected an active fault. This fault can be accessed with ServiceRanger. See the Fault Code Isolation Procedure Index starting on page 19. - in Gear Display 1. A - in the gear display indicates the transmission is stuck in gear. See the Symptom Driven Diagnostic Index on page 23. ** in Gear Display 1. A ** in the gear display indicates the gear display has power but no communication on the data link. See the Symptom Driven Diagnostic Index on page 23. - - in Gear Display 1. A - - in the gear display indicates the gear display has power, and there is no communication present on the data link, or the TECU isnt communicating with the display. See the Symptom Driven Diagnostic Index on page 23. Blank Gear Display 1. A Blank gear display indicates the display has lost power, or the TECU isnt communicating with the gear display. See the Symptom Driven Diagnostic Index on page 23. 29 Power-Up Sequence Test Overview This test must be performed only if you experience a vehicle wont crank with a - -, **, or blank gear display. You must perform the Electrical Pretest prior to this procedure. Possible Causes TECU Power Supply TECU Fallback Mode There is no fallback for this concern and the vehicle will not crank if the TECU or power supply harness has failed. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Battery Load Tester Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Perform the Electrical Pretest 2. Is concern still present after the Electrical Pretest. Yes Replace the TECU. Return to the Diagnostic Procedure. No Test Complete. Return to the Diagnostic Procedure. 30 Overview Power-Up Sequence Test 31 Electrical Pretest Overview This test must be performed prior to diagnosing select Hybrid faults. This test verifies the quality of the standard battery system and the main power and ground supplies to the Hybrid Control Module (HCM), Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU), and Electronic Clutch Actuator (ECA). Note: This test will be called out in the procedures where it is required. Possible Causes Low-voltage can be caused by the following: Low batteries Charging system Power harness connections or fuses to TECU, HCM, or ECA Fallback Mode When Fault is Set A weak power supply can cause many issues such as shift performance, power-up or failure to crank. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Battery Load Tester Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger 32 Electrical Pretest Wiring Schematic Electrical Pretest Electrical Pretest Wiring Schematic A B C ECA - 3-Way Connector H Battery 38 Plus (+) B HCM HCM Power (Vehicle) 36 ECA ECA Power C ECA Ground Neg (-) Clutch Ignition (System) Front View (HCM - Vehicle Interface Connector) 37 38 35 36 1 6 7 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 ECA -Pack 8-Way Connector E A B C D H G F NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations HCM Ground (Vehicle) TECU TECU Ground 36 35 38 TECU Ignition TECU Power 13 Front View (TECU - Vehicle Interface Connector) 37 38 35 36 1 6 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 7 35 HCM Ignition (Vehicle) Ignition Relay 87 33 Electrical Pretest Electrical Pretest Procedures Electrical Pretest Procedures Electrical Pretest Procedures Continued STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Inspect starter/battery and in line fuse holder connections on Electric Clutch Actuator (ECA), Hybrid Control Module (HCM), and Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) for integrity. Note: ECA, HCM, and TECU use a 30 amp fuse. Refer to OEM for locations 3. Measure voltage across batteries. If voltage is 23 to 25 volts on a 24-volt system Proceed with battery load test. Repair or replace batteries as required. Go to STEP B If voltage is outside of range Repair or replace batteries and charging system as required. Repeat this step. STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Key on. 2. Connect ServiceRanger to 9-pin diagnostic connector in the cab. 3. Select the Data Monitor option and view the following parameters under the Hybrid (clutch actuator) list. If PID 132 is within 0.6 volts of battery voltage and PID 160 reads 1 Go to STEP C a. PID 132 Clutch Actuator Battery Voltage. b. PID 160 Clutch Actuator Ignition Switch Status. If either voltage is out of range Repair main power or ignition supply to the ECA. Repeat this step. Note: If the clutch parameters can not be viewed on ServiceRanger you must check the power supply to the ECA with a voltmeter 34 Electrical Pretest Procedures Electrical Pretest Electrical Pretest Procedures Continued Electrical Pretest Procedures Continued STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Select the Data Monitor option and view the following parameters under the Hybrid (Hybrid Control Module) list. a. PID 165 Battery Potential Voltage b. PID 166 Ignition Switch Status. If PID 165 is within 0.6 volts of battery voltage and PID 166 reads 1 Go to STEP D Note: If the Battery Potential Voltage or Ignition Switch Status can not be viewed on ServiceRanger you must check the power supply to the HCM with a voltmeter. If either voltage is out of range Repair the main power or ignition supply to the HCM. Repeat this step. STEP D Procedure Condition Action 1. Select the Data Monitor option and view the following parameters under the Hybrid (Transmission) list. a. PID 168 Battery Potential Voltage. b. PID 158 Battery Potential Voltage Switched. If PID 168 is within 0.6 volts of battery voltage and PID 158 is within 0.6 volts of ignition voltage Test complete. Return to the Fault or Symptom procedure that directed you to this step. Note: If the Battery Potential Voltage or Battery Potential Voltage Switched can not be viewed on ServiceRanger you must check the power supply to the TECU with a voltmeter. If either voltage is out of range Repair main power or ignition supply to the TECU. Repeat this step. 35 Hybrid Electrical Pretest Overview This test must be performed prior to diagnosing select Hybrid faults. This test verifies the power supply for the Inverter and Battery Control Unit (BCU). Note: You must perform the Electrical Pretest before the Hybrid Electrical Pretest. Note: This test will be called out in the procedures where it is required. Possible Causes Low-voltage can be caused by the following: Power harness connections from Inverter or BCU. Fallback Mode When Fault is Set Loss of ignition power will cause the Hybrid system to be inoperable. The vehicle will run under diesel power only. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 Battery Load Tester Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger 36 Hybrid Electrical Pretest Wiring Schematic Hybrid Electrical Pretest Hybrid Electrical Pretest Wiring Schematic Inverter Chassis Ground 1 Deutsch 19 - Way Mating Connector View (PEC - Low Voltage Connector) 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 6 7 6 PEC
10 20 30 40 1 11 21 31 Deutsch 40-Way Mating Connector View (Inverter - Low Voltage Connector) 7 9 14 25 GND-BC2 Relay Box Enable Inverter Enable Chassis Ground 2 HCM (Pin 2) DC/DC Converter 4-Way OEM Connector 4 3 1 2 DC/DC Converter 4 Ground NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations Relay Box Enable 2 GND_BC 24 15 37 Hybrid Electrical Pretest Hybrid Electrical Pretest Procedures Hybrid Electrical Pretest Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Perform the Electrical Pretest then continue to step two. 2. Key off. ! WARNING Follow Hybrid Shutdown Procedure found at front of book, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage. 3. Disconnect the Inverter 40- way connector. 4. Measure resistance from pin 6 to battery negative and then from pin 7 to battery negative. If resistance is 0 to 0.3 ohms from pin 6 to battery negative and from pin 7 to battery negative Go to STEP B If resistance is outside of range Repair the Inverter ground harness. Repeat this step. STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Connect a multi meter to the Inverter 40-way connector pin 9 and pin 6. 2. Key on. 3. Observe multi meter voltage reading. If voltage is 23 to 25 volts Go to STEP C If voltage is outside of range Repair the harness from the HCM. Repeat this step. 38 Hybrid Electrical Pretest Procedures Hybrid Electrical Pretest STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect the Inverter 40- way connector. 3. Disconnect the PEC 19-way connector. 4. Measure resistance from PEC pin 7 to battery negative. If resistance from pin 7 to battery negative is 0 to 0.3 ohms Go to STEP D If resistance is outside of range Repair the Inverter to PEC ground wire. Repeat this step. STEP D Procedure Condition Action 1. Connect a multi meter to the PEC 19-way connector pins 6 and pin 7. 2. Key on. 3. Observe multi meter voltage reading. If voltage is 23 to 25 volts If vehicle has ePTO feature on Push Button go to STEP E. If vehicle does not have ePTO feature test complete. Reconnect PEC 19-way connector. Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure Index page 19. 4. If voltage is outside of range Repair the power supply harness from the Inverter. Repeat this step. 39 Hybrid Electrical Pretest Hybrid Electrical Pretest Procedures STEP E Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect PEC 19-way connector. 3. Disconnect DC/DC Converter 4-way connector. 4. Measure resistance from DC/DC Converter 4-way connector pin 4 to battery negative. If resistance between pin 4 and battery negative is 0 to 0.3 ohms Test Complete. Reconnect the 4-way connector. Return to Fault Code Isolation Procedure Index page 19. If resistance is outside of range Repair the ground harness from the DC/DC Converter to battery negative. Repeat this step. 40 Hybrid Electrical Pretest Procedures Hybrid Electrical Pretest 41 Fault Code 1 Isolation Procedures Motor/Generator Current Sensor Fault SA 239 SPN 520225 FMI 0, 6, 15 Overview The high-voltage Motor/Generator assembly is connected to the Inverter assembly through an AC high-voltage cable that contains three separate cables. During operation the Inverter monitors the amperage in the AC cables through a current sensor, which is mounted inside the Inverter. The inductive sensor produces an output based on amperage present in the cables. Conditions to Run Fault The Inverter ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 6 is set when Inverter detects current input from the Motor/Generator greater than 100 amps for 150 ms FMI 0 is set when the Inverter detects current input from the Motor/Generator greater than 200 amps for 0.3 ms. FMI 15 is set when the sensor offset is out of range at initial check. Possible Causes FMI 0,6 Inverter Motor/Generator AC Cable FMI 15 - Inverter Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 1 is set the following conditions will occur: The amber Check Hybrid lamp will display. Fault is stored in Hybrid Control Module (HCM) memory. Electric Motor/Generator assist and regen are disabled, however, the high-voltage relays will remain powered. HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode. Transmission defaults start gear to 1st. Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. 42 Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 1 Isolation Procedures Required Tools Warnings and Cautions A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Basic Hand Tools High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger WARNING To reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE 43 Fault Code 1 Isolation Procedures Connector Views Connector Views High-Voltage AC Harness Connector View (Amphenol Connector) W U V E D F W V U W V U Inverter Motor/ Generator Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations High-Voltage AC Motor/Gen Connector View (Amphenol Connector) U V W F E D Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 44 Fault Procedures Fault Code 1 Isolation Procedures Fault Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Key off. 3. Follow Hybrid Shutdown Procedure page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage. 4. Remove the AC cable from the Motor/Generator and Inverter 5. Measure resistance of each circuit in the AC high-voltage cable: U-U V-V W-W If resistance for each circuit is less than 1 ohm Go to STEP B If resistance is outside of range Replace the AC high-voltage cable. Go to STEP V If FMI 15 is active Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Measure resistance of each circuit to ground in the AC high-voltage cable. If resistance between each circuit and ground is 5M ohms or greater Go to STEP C If resistance is outside of range Replace the AC high-voltage cable. Go to STEP V 45 Fault Code 1 Isolation Procedures Fault Procedures STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Measure the resistance between the following AC high-voltage cable pins: If resistance of each phase is 5M or greater Go to STEP D U-U V-V W-W If resistance is outside of range Replace the AC high-voltage cable. Go to STEP V STEP D Procedure Condition Action 1. Measure resistance of each Motor/Generator phase at the following pins: If resistance of each phase is less than 10 ohms Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V U-U V-V W-W If resistance is outside of range Replace the Motor/Generator. Go to STEP V STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. Go to Fault Code Retrieval/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. Go to Fault Code Retrieval/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 1 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 1 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure Index on page 19 46 Fault Procedures Fault Code 1 Isolation Procedures 47 Fault Code 2 Isolation Procedures Motor/Generator Temperature Sensor Fault SA 239 SPN 520226 FMI 3 Overview The Motor/Generator temperature sensor is a thermistor located inside the Motor/Generator that changes in value based on the temperature. The Inverter supplies a 5 volt reference voltage to the sensor and measures the volt drop in the circuit. When the Motor/Generator temperature is warm the sensor resistance is low and the Inverter detects a low-voltage (0.2 volts equals 280C or 536F). When the Motor/Generator is cold the sensor resistance is high and the Inverter detects a high-voltage (4.1 volts equals 0C or 32F). Conditions to Run Fault The inverter ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 3 is set when the sensor voltage is greater than 4.1 volts for 10 seconds, while the Inverter temperature is over 35 C or 95F, or if the sensor output voltage is less than 0.2 volts for 10 seconds. Possible Causes FMI 3 - Motor/Generator - Short/open temperature sensor wires between the Motor/Generator and the Inverter - Inverter Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 2 is set the following conditions will occur: The amber Check Hybrid lamp will display Fault is stored in Hybrid Control Module (HCM) memory High-voltage Motor/Generator assist is available, but at a reduced amount Conditions to Clear Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. 48 Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 2 Isolation Procedures Required Tools Basic Hand Tools High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger Warnings and Cautions A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. 49 Fault Code 2 Isolation Procedures Connector Views Connector Views 36 37 2 1 Inverter Motor/Generator Temperature Sensor TM Ground TM Temp Sensor Temp Sensor OTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Location 10 20 30 40 1 11 21 31 Deutsch 40-Way Mating Connector View (Inverter - Low Voltage Connector) Terminal Side - Harness Connector Temperature Sensor (Deutsch 2-pin connector) 50 Fault Code Procedures Fault Code 2 Isolation Procedures Fault Code Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Key off. 3. Follow Hybrid Shutdown Procedure found at front of book, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high- voltage. 4. Disconnect the Temperature Sensor connector at the Motor/Generator. 5. Measure resistance at the Motor/Generator 2-way Temperature Sensor connector from pin 1 to pin 2. If resistance is 0.8K ohms to 301.7K ohms Go to STEP B If resistance is outside of range Replace the Motor/Generator. Go to STEP V WARNING 51 Fault Code 2 Isolation Procedures Fault Code Procedures STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Key Off. 2. Disconnect the Inverter 40-way connector. 3. Reconnect the Motor/ Generator 2-way temperature sensor connector. 4. Measure resistance at the following: a. Inverter 40-way connector pin 37 to pin 36. b. Inverter 40-way connector pin 37 to ground. If resistance is 0.8K - 301.7K ohms between pin 37 and pin 36 and resistance between pin 37 and ground is 10K ohms or greater Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V. If resistance is outside of range Repair the open or short to ground in the harness between the Inverter 40-way connector and the Motor/Generator 2-way connector. Go to STEP V. STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Retrieval/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Retrieval/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 2 appears Return to STEP A to find the error in testing. If code other than 2 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure Index page 19 52 Fault Code Procedures Fault Code 2 Isolation Procedures 53 Fault Code 3 Isolation Procedures Motor/Generator Temperature Fault SA 239 SPN 520227 FMI 0 Overview The Motor/Generator temperature is measured through a thermistor style sensor, which is located internal to the unit. The sensor changes value based on the temperature. The Inverter supplies a 5 volt reference voltage to the sensor and measures the volt drop in the circuit. When the Motor/ Generator temperature is warm the sensor resistance is low and the Inverter detects a low-voltage (0.2 volts equals 280C or 536F). When the Motor/Generator is cold the sensor resistance is high and the Inverter detects a high-voltage (4.1 volts equals 0C or 32F). Conditions to Run Fault The Inverter ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 0 is set when the temperature sensor value is greater than 185C or 365F for 1 second. Possible Causes FMI 0 - Motor/Generator - Inverter - Liquid cooling system (low coolant, no coolant flow, coolant pump, radiator, radiator fan, reservoir) Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 3 is set the following conditions will occur: The amber Check Hybrid lamp will display Fault is stored in Hybrid Control Module (HCM) memory Electric Motor/Generator assist and regen are disabled, however, the high-voltage relays will remain powered HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode Transmission defaults start gear to 1st Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. 54 Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 3 Isolation Procedures Required Tools Basic Hand Tools High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger Warnings and Cautions A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. 55 Fault Code 3 Isolation Procedures Connector Views Connector Views 36 37 2 1 Inverter Motor/Generator Temperature Sensor TM Ground TM Temp Sensor Temp Sensor NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations 10 20 30 40 1 11 21 31 Deutsch 40-Way Mating Connector View (Inverter - Low Voltage Connector) Terminal Side - Harness Connector Temperature Sensor (Deutsch 2-pin connector) 56 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 3 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9- pin diagnostic connector. 2. Follow Hybrid Shutdown Procedure found at front of book, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage. 3. Key on 4. Select the Data Monitor option and view PID 113 Motor/Generator Temperature in the Power Electronics list. 5. Observe PID 113 again after 20 minutes If PID 113 Motor/Generator Temperature dropped from the first reading Go to STEP B If PID 113 Motor/Generator Temperature remained the same Go to STEP H STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Observe the coolant level after the system has cooled down to ensure if is filled to the proper level If coolant is within the recommended limits Go to STEP C If coolant is below the recommended limits Refer to the OEM for coolant type and fill procedures. Check for source of coolant leak. When refilling the system it should be pressurized or vacuum bleed of air to ensure the coolant will flow properly during normal operation. WARNING 57 Fault Code 3 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Visually inspect the Hybrid liquid cooling system radiator for debris, obstruction to airflow, or sharp bends in the coolant lines If the radiator is free of debris and the coolant lines are not bent sharply Go to STEP D If the radiator has debris, the air flow is obstructed, or the coolants lines are bent sharply Repair the concern. Go to STEP V STEP D Procedure Condition Action 1. Key on. 2. Connect ServiceRanger to the 9-pin connector in the cab. 3. Select the Advanced Product Functions option and select the Cooling Pump option. 4. Enable the Cooling Pump option If the coolant pump turns on Go to STEP E If the coolant pump does not turn on Go to STEP F STEP E Procedure Condition Action 1. Select the Advanced Product Functions option and select the Heat Exchanger Fan option 2. Enable the Heat Exchanger Fan option If the heat exchanger fan turns on The system needs to be purged of air to allow the coolant to flow. Bleed the air by using a coolant system pressurizing tool or a vacuum tool. Go to STEP V If the heat exchanger fan does not turn on Go to STEP G 58 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 3 Isolation Procedures STEP F Procedure Condition Action 1. Key on 2. Disconnect the Coolant Pump 2-way connector 3. Select the Advanced Products Function option and select Cooling Pump. 4. Enable the Cooling Pump option. 5. Measure voltage at the 2-way connector from pin A to B. If voltage between pins A and B is +/- 0.2 volts of battery voltage Refer to OEM for Coolant Pump concern. If voltage between pins A and B is outside of range Refer to OEM for repair procedures on Cooling Pump power harness or damaged fuse. STEP G Procedure Condition Action 1. Key on 2. Disconnect the Heat Exchanger Fan 2-way connector. 3. Select the Advanced Products Function option and select the Heat Exchanger Fan. 4. Enable the Heat Exchanger Fan option. 5. Measure voltage at the 2-way connector from pin A to B. If voltage between pins A and B is +/- 0.2 volts of battery voltage Refer to OEM for Heat Exchanger Fan concern. If voltage between pins A and B is outside of range Refer to OEM for repair procedures on Heat Exchanger Fan power harness or damaged fuse. 59 Fault Code 3 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP H Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Disconnect the Inverter 40-way connector 3. Measure resistance between pins 36 and 37, and pin 37 to ground of the Inverter 40-way connector If resistance is 0.8K - 301.7K ohms between pin 37 and pin 36 and resistance between pin 37 and ground is 10K ohms or greater Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V If resistance is outside the range Go to STEP I STEP I Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Disconnect the Motor/ Generator Temperature Sensor 2-way connector located on the right side of the Motor/Generator 3. Measure resistance between the 2-way Temperature sensor connector from pin 1 to pin 2 If resistance is 0.8K - 301.7K ohms Repair the shorted HCM system harness between the Inverter 40-way connector and Motor/ Generator 2-way connector. If resistance is outside the range Replace the Motor/Generator. Go to STEP V 60 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 3 Isolation Procedures STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 3 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 3 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 61 Fault Code 4 Isolation Procedures Motor/Generator Rotation Speed Sensor Fault SA 239 SPN 520228 FMI 0, 2, 21-27 Overview The Motor/Generator Rotation Speed Sensor is mounted to the back of the Motor/Generator around the input shaft. The sensor is a two piece design with the rotor being mounted to the input shaft and the sensing ring being mounted to the motor housing. The sensing ring is supplied with low-voltage during operation. When the rotor turns it induces a voltage fluctuation into the sensing ring, which is then converted into a digital signal for Motor/Generator RPM. Voltage output and frequency is low at idle and increases with RPM. Conditions to Run Fault The Inverters ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. FMI 2 will not run if there is an active Transmission Input Shaft Speed Sensor fault. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 0 is set when the Motor/Generator speed exceeds the normal allowable range. FMI 2 is set when the Motor/Generator speed is different than Transmission Input Shaft Speed by more than 100 RPM for at least 10 seconds. FMI 21 is set when a resolver signal line short to 24-volt or ground is detected. FMI 22,24,25 are set when the combination of the analog-to-digital converter signals is a mismatch FMI 27 is set when the Inverter detects and error in the initial check FMI 23 is set when there is an analog-to-digital converter output error signal for 100ms FMI 26 is set when the rotation sensor speed is greater than 6000 min-1 for 10 ms Possible Causes FMI 0 - Long extended grades may require intermittent use of the service brakes to slow the vehicle FMI 21 - Inverter - Resolver Harness between the Motor/Generator and Inverter FMI 22,24,25,27 - Inverter FMI 2,23,26 - Inverter - Motor/Generator - Resolver Harness between the Motor/Generator and Inverter 62 Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 4 Isolation Procedures Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 4 is set the following conditions will occur: The amber Check Hybrid lamp will display Fault is stored in Hybrid Control Module (HCM) memory Electric Motor/Generator assist and regen are disabled, however, the high-voltage relays will remain powered HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode Transmission defaults start gear to 1st Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger Warnings and Cautions A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. 63 Fault Code 4 Isolation Procedures Connector Views High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Connector Views 40 30 3 4 Inverter Motor/Generator Resolver REZ_Minus REZ_Plus 38 28 1 2 39 29 5 6 REZ_S2 REZ_S4 REZ_S1 REZ_S3 Resolver Resolver Resolver Resolver Resolver Resolver NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations Terminal Side - Harness Connector Resolver (Deutsch 6-pin connector) 10 20 30 40 1 11 21 31 Deutsch 40-Way Mating Connector View (Inverter - Low Voltage Connector) 64 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 4 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Key off. 3. Follow Hybrid Shutdown Procedure found at front of book, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage. 4. What FMIs are present. If FMI 22,24,25, or 27 are listed Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V If FMI 2,23, or 26 are listed Go to STEP B If FMI 21 is listed Go to STEP D STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Disconnect the 40-way low- voltage connector at the Inverter. 2. Measure Resolver resistance at the 40-pin harness connector between the following pins: 30 - 40 28 - 38 29 - 39 If resistance for the following pins are: Pin 30-40 is 10.5 to 8.6 ohms Pin 28-38 is 34 to 28 ohms Pin 29-39 is 27 to 23 ohms If FMI 2 is active contact Eaton at 1-800-826-HELP (4357). If FMI 26 or 23 are active replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V If resistance is outside of range for any of the readings Go to STEP C WARNING 65 Fault Code 4 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Disconnect the 6-way Motor/ Generator resolver connector. 2. Measure the Resolver resistance at the 6-pin harness connector between the following pins: 3-4 1-2 5-6 Note: An auto-ranging digital volt/ ohm meter must be used. If resistance for the following pins are: Pin 3-4 is 10.5 to 8.6 ohms Pin 1-2 is 34 to 28 ohms Pin 5-6 is 27 to 23 ohms Repair the open harness between the Inverter 40-pin connector and the Motor/ Generator 6-pin Resolver connector. Go to STEP V If resistance is outside of range Replace the Motor/Generator. Go to STEP V STEP D Procedure Condition Action 1. Disconnect the 40-way connector at the inverter 2. Use an ohm meter to measure a short to both ground and vehicle battery 24 volt on the following pins 28 29 38 39 Note: An auto-ranging digital volt/ ohm meter must be used. If there is continuity at any of the following pins: Pin 28 Pin 29 Pin 38 Pin 39 Repair resolver vehicle harness between the Inverter and Motor/ Generator. Go to STEP V If meter reads Open or OL Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V 66 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 4 Isolation Procedures STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 4 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 4 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 67 Fault Code 5 Isolation Procedures Motor/Generator AC Cable Fault SA 239 SPN 520229 FMI 21-29 Overview The Motor/Generator AC cables are connected from the Motor/Generator to the Inverter. These cables carry up to 500 volts AC 3 phase when the vehicle is in operation. Conditions to Run Fault The Inverters ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. FMI 25-27 require the Motor/Generator RPM to be greater than 500 RPM. FMI 28 requires the Motor/Generator RPM to be less than 500 RPM. FMI 29 requires the Motor/Generator RPM to be less than 50 RPM. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 21 is set when the AC interlock circuit is open. FMI 22,23,24 are set when the 2 phase motor current is more than 360 amps for 0.9 ms. FMI 25,26,27 are set when the Inverter detects a single open wire and motor current is less than 8 amps for 200ms at speeds >= 500 RPM and current command from the Inverter is > 20 amps. FMI 28 is set when Motor/Generator current is less than 8A for 200ms at Speed < |500RPM| and current command > 20A(rms). FMI 29 is set during initialization, the Inverter checks if the AC cable is connected between the Motor and Inverter by sending out 20A for 200ms and checking the feedback. Possible Causes FMI 21 - AC Cable Interlock FMI 22,23,24 - Inverter - Motor/Generator - AC Cable FMI 25,26,27,28,29 - Motor/Generator - AC Cable Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 5 is set the following conditions will occur: The red Stop Hybrid lamp will display. Fault is stored in Hybrid Control Module (HCM) memory. Inverter shuts high-voltage system off. HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode. 68 Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 5 Isolation Procedures If FMI 28, or 29 is present at power-up, the vehicle will not crank. Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger Warnings and Cautions A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. WARNING To reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE DANGER HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE You will be severly injured or killed if you do not follow the procedure. Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. 69 Fault Code 5 Isolation Procedures Connector Views Connector Views High-Voltage AC Harness Connector View (Amphenol Connector) W U V E D F W V U W V U Inverter Motor/ Generator Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Location High-Voltage AC Motor/Gen Connector View (Amphenol Connector) U V W F E D Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 70 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 5 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Key off. 3. Follow Hybrid Shutdown Procedure found at front of book, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage. 4. What faults are present If Fault Code 5 FMI 21 is active Go to STEP E If Fault Code 5 FMI 22, 23, or 24 are active Go to STEP B If Fault Code 5 FMI 25, 26, 27, 28, or 29 are active Go to STEP C STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Remove the AC high-voltage cable at the Motor/Generator and Inverter. 3. Measure the resistance between the following AC Cable pins: U - V V - W W - U If resistance between each phase is 5M ohms or greater Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V If resistance is outside of range Replace the AC high-voltage cable. Go to STEP V WARNING 71 Fault Code 5 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Disconnect the AC high- voltage cable from the Inverter and Motor/ Generator. 2. Measure the resistance of the AC high-voltage cable from the Inverter connector to the Motor/Generator connector on each of the following pins: U - U V - V W - W Note: An Auto Ranging Digital Volt/Ohm Meter must be used. If the resistance of each circuit is 1 ohm or less Go to STEP D If resistance is outside of range Replace the AC high-voltage cable. Go to STEP V STEP D Procedure Condition Action 1. Measure the resistance of the AC high-voltage cable from the Inverter connector to the Motor/Generator connector on each of the following pins: U - V V - W W - U Note: An Auto Ranging Digital Volt/Ohm Meter must be used. If the resistance of each phase is 10 ohms or less Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V If resistance is outside of range Replace the Motor/Generator. Go to STEP V 72 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 5 Isolation Procedures STEP E Procedure Condition Action 1. Check the AC cable connectors at the Motor/Gen and Inverter to ensure they are properly connected If connections are loose or not properly connected Reconnect AC Cables to component. Go to STEP V If connections are not loose and are properly connected Go to STEP F STEP F Procedure Condition Action 1. Disconnect the AC cable from the motor/generator and inverter. 2. Measure the interlock circuit resistance from the Inverter connector and the Motor/ Generator connector at the following pins: D - D E - E Note: An Auto Ranging Digital Volt/Ohm Meter must be used. If the resistance is 0 - 0.3 ohms Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V If resistance is outside of range Replace the AC cable between the Inverter and Motor/Generator. Go to STEP V 73 Fault Code 5 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 5 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 5 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 74 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 5 Isolation Procedures 75 Fault Code 6 Isolation Procedures No ECU Operation Fault (HCM) SA 239 SPN 629 FMI 14 Overview The Hybrid Control Module (HCM) is mounted to the transmission and it contains all of the software to control both the Hybrid power electronics as well as the transmission operation. Conditions to Run Fault The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 14 is set when HCM can not complete the write of EEPROM during shut down. Possible Causes FMI 14 - HCM Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 6 is set the following conditions will occur: The amber Check Hybrid lamp will display if the HCM sets the fault after power-up. If the fault occurs at power-up the vehicle may not crank. Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools ServiceRanger 76 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 6 Isolation Procedures Note: No Schematic for this Code. Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature. Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. If code 6 is active Replace Hybrid Control Module (HCM) (Only when fault code is active). If code 6 is inactive Test complete. 77 Fault Code 7 Isolation Procedures Improper ECU Configuration Fault (HCM) SA 239 SPN 629 FMI 13 Overview The Hybrid Control Module (HCM) is mounted to the transmission and it contains all of the software to control both the Hybrid power electronics as well as the transmission operation. Conditions to Run Fault The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 13 is set at key on if the HCM data is not read from memory within 1 second. Possible Causes FMI 13 - Improper ECU configuration software Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 7 is set the following conditions will occur: The amber Check Hybrid lamp will display. Fault is stored in HCM memory. If this fault occurs at power-up, the vehicle will not crank. Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools ServiceRanger Note: No Schematic for this Code. Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature. 78 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 7 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Turn ignition off for 2 seconds. 3. Key on. 4. Is fault code 7 active If code 7 is active Replace the Hybrid Control Module (HCM) (only if the fault codes are active) If code 7 is inactive Test complete. 79 Fault Code 8 Isolation Procedures Loss of Switched Ignition Power Fault (HCM) SA 239 SPN 158 FMI 4 Overview The Hybrid Control Module (HCM) is mounted to the transmission and it contains all of the software to control both the Hybrid power electronics as well as the transmission operation. The HCM ignition power is a single 24-volt feed that is fused and runs through the HCM 38-way vehicle connector. Conditions to Run Fault Output shaft speed must be greater than 0 rpm Conditions to Set Fault FMI 4 is set when the HCM loses ignition power during operation for 2 seconds or greater. Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) page 25. Possible Causes FMI 4 - Ignition power supply to HCM - HCM Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 8 is set the following conditions will occur: The amber Check Hybrid lamp will display only if the vehicle is moving. Fault is stored in HCM memory. The red 'Service lamp will display and an F will flash in the gear display if the fault occurs prior to power-up. Fault is stored in Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) memory due to lack of communication with the HCM. If the faults occurs while the vehicle is moving, the transmission will remain in place and the clutch will open when the vehicle comes to an idle. The clutch will close and the vehicle will operate in 1st and reverse from stop. If this fault occurs at power-up, the vehicle will not crank. Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. 80 Loss of Switched Ignition Power Fault (HCM) Fault Code 8 Isolation Procedures Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger HCM 30 86 87 85 87 86 85 30 35 Ignition
P l u s NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations 81 Fault Code 8 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Perform Electrical Pretest If code 8 is active after performing the Electrical Pretest Replace the HCM (only if fault code is active). go to Step V. If code 8 is inactive after performing the Electrical Pretest Go to STEP V STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Key off. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes 5. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 6. Drive the vehicle and attempt to reset the code If no codes Test complete. 7. Check for codes If code 8 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 8 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 82 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 8 Isolation Procedures 83 Fault Code 9 Isolation Procedures Weak Battery Voltage Fault (HCM) SA 239 SPN 168 FMI 14 Overview The Hybrid Control Module (HCM) is mounted to the transmission and it contains all of the software to control both the Hybrid power electronics as well as the transmission operation. The HCM main battery power is a 24-volt feed that is fused and runs through the HCM 38-way vehicle connector with the main ground wire returning to the battery negative terminal. Conditions to Run Fault The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. The HCM System Battery Voltage Low Fault is not active. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 14 is set when the HCM battery voltage drops below 9 volts for 10 seconds. Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25. Possible Causes FMI 14 - Power supply harness to the HCM - Low batteries or bad main power connection - Charging system Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 9 is set the following conditions will occur: The amber Check Hybrid lamp will display. Fault is stored in HCM memory. Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger 84 Connector Views Fault Code 9 Isolation Procedures Connector Views HCM 30 86 87 85 30
P l u s 38 VBATT NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations 36 HCM Ground 85 Fault Code 9 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Perform Electrical Pretest. If code 9 is active after performing the Electrical Pretest Replace HCM (only if Fault Code is active). Go to STEP V If code 9 is inactive after performing the Electrical Pretest Clear codes. Go to STEP V STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 9 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 9 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 86 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 9 Isolation Procedures 87 Fault Code 10 Isolation Procedures Low Battery Voltage Fault (HCM) SA 239 SPN 168 FMI 4 Overview The Hybrid Control Module (HCM) is mounted to the transmission and it contains all of the software to control both the Hybrid power electronics as well as the transmission operation. The HCM main battery power is a 24-volt feed that is fused and runs through the HCM 38-way vehicle connector with the main ground wire returning to the battery negative terminal. Conditions to Run Fault The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 4 is set when the HCM battery voltage drops below 7 volts for more than 1 second. Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25. Possible Causes FMI 4 - Power supply harness to the HCM. - Low batteries or bad main power connection. - Charging system. Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 10 is set the following conditions will occur: The amber Check Hybrid lamp will display. Fault is stored in HCM memory. Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger 88 Connector Views Fault Code 10 Isolation Procedures Connector Views HCM 30 86 87 85 30
P l u s 38 VBATT NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations 36 HCM Ground 89 Fault Code 10 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Perform Electrical Pretest. If code 10 is active after performing the Electrical Pretest Replace HCM (only if Fault Code is active). Go to STEP V If code 10 is inactive after performing the Electrical Pretest Clear codes. Go to STEP V STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 10 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 10 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 90 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 10 Isolation Procedures 91 Fault Code 11 Isolation Procedures No ECU Operation Fault (TECU) SA 3 SPN 629 MID 130 SID 254 FMI 12 Overview The Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) is mounted to the transmission and it contains all of the software to control the transmission operation, however, the Hybrid Control Module (HCM) controls the operation of the TECU during Hybrid operation. Conditions to Run Fault The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 12 is set if the TECU detects an intermittent failure in the Electronic Shifter position. Possible Causes FMI 12 - Electric Shifter Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 11 is set the following conditions will occur: The red 'Service lamp will display and an F will flash in the gear display only if the fault occurs after power-up. Fault is stored in TECU memory. If the fault code occurs after power-up, the transmission will remain in the current gear and the clutch will open. Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools ServiceRanger 92 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 11 Isolation Procedures Note: No Schematic for this Code. Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature. Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. If code 11 is active Replace Electric Shifter (only if fault code is active). If code 11 is inactive Test complete. 93 Fault Code 12 Isolation Procedures Improper ECU Configuration Fault (TECU) SA 3 SPN 629 MID 130 SID 254 FMI 13 Overview The Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) is mounted to the transmission and it contains all of the software to control the transmission operation, however, the HCM controls the operation of the TECU during Hybrid operation. Conditions to Run Fault The TECU is powered and ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 13 is set when the Gen 3 ECU is not reading valid information from memory, including the transmission table and calibration values within 1 second of power-up. Possible Causes FMI 13 - Improper ECU Configuration Software Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 12 is set the following conditions will occur: The red 'Service lamp will display and an F will flash in the gear display If the fault occurs at power-up the vehicle will not crank Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools ServiceRanger 94 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 12 Isolation Procedures Note: No Schematic for this Code. Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature. Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. If code 12 is active Replace the Transmission ECU (only if the fault code is active). If code 12 is inactive Test complete. 95 Fault Code 14 Isolation Procedures Invalid Shifter Range SA 3 SPN 751 SID/PID 18, 19 FMI 2, 3, 4 Overview The Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) is connected to the shift device, which sends driver mode selection data. The only compatible shift devices are the Eaton Push Button Shift Control (PBSC) and OEM supplied shift lever (if equipped with park). The TECU checks the vehicle for the type of shift device during the first power-up. Conditions to Run Fault The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. The TECU System Battery Voltage Low Fault is not active. The TECU is being powered up for the first time and no shift device has been configured. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 2 is set when the shifter is not returning a valid position (PRNDH1) FMI 3 is set when the sensor voltage is higher than expected FMI 4 is set when the sensor voltage is lower than expected Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25. Possible Causes FMI 2 - shifter is in between detent positions or sensor is out of calibration. FMI 3 - sensor input is shorted high or sensor ground in open FMI 4 - sensor input is open circuit or shorted to ground Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 14 is set the following conditions will occur: A F will show in the gear display Fault is stored in TECU memory TECU changes to AutoShift control The engine will not crank Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. 96 Connector Views Fault Code 14 Isolation Procedures Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit Digital Volt/Ohm Meter ServiceRanger Connector Views Harness Front View (TECU - Vehicle Interface Connector) 37 38 35 36 1 6 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 7 NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations Park Pawl Actuator 3 1 4 2 Park Pawl Actuator Park Pawl Actuator Park Pawl Actuator Park Pawl Actuator 17 16 15 31 Shift Return (Minus) Shift Control Input 1 Shift Control (Plus) Shift Control Input 2 TECU 2 3 4 1 4-Pin Park Pawl Actuator Connector 97 Fault Code 14 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Disconnect the 4-way connector to the park pawl actuator 2. Key on 3. Check for 24V supply at 4-pin connector at pins 1 and 2 If voltage between pins 1 and 2 is +/- 0.2 volts of battery voltage Go to STEP B If voltage is outside the range Go to STEP D STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. With the actuator/shift lever in the Neutral position check voltage on pins: 3 to ground 4 to ground If voltage is between 2.25V and 2.75 V Go to STEP C If voltage is outside the range Replace Sensor. Go to STEP V STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Disconnect the TECU Vehicle Harness 38-way connector 2. Check continuity between: 38-way connector pin 15 and 4-pin connector pin 4 38-way connector pin 16 and 4-pin connector pin 3 If continuity is okay Replace the TECU. Go to STEP V If an open is found Repair or replace the Harness. Go to STEP V 98 Fault Code 14 Isolation Procedures STEP D Procedure Condition Action 1. Disconnect the TECU Vehicle Harness 38-way connector 2. Check continuity between: 38-way connector pin 17 and 4-pin connector pin 1 38-way connector pin 31 and 4-pin connector pin 2 If continuity is okay Replace the TECU. Go to STEP V If an open is found Repair or replace the Harness. Go to STEP V STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable 3. Key on 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 14 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 14 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 99 Fault Code 16 Isolation Procedures High Integrity Link (HIL) Fault SA 3 SPN 625 MID 130 SID 248 FMI 2 Overview The High Integrity Link (HIL) is a high-speed twisted pair 500K proprietary data link that connects the Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) to the Push Button Shift Control (PBSC). Each module contains a 120 ohm resistor internally. The link carries information like driver mode selection as well as fault information to light the service lamp. Conditions to Run Fault The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. The TECU System Battery Voltage Low Fault is not active. The TECU Driver Interface Configuration is set to High-Integrity Link (HIL). Conditions to Set Fault FMI 2 is set when the TECU looses communication for 5 seconds or more with the PBSC. Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25. Possible Causes FMI 2 - HIL data link - PBSC - TECU - Power supply harness from TECU to PBSC Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 16 is set the following conditions will occur: An F will show on the gear display. The Push Button Mode lamp flashes next to the selected mode and the Service lamp will remain off. The Push Button lamps will come on and then remain off if the data link fails at power-up. Fault is stored in TECU memory. The operation mode will be changed to AutoShift Fallback Mode. If the code is active during power-up, the transmission will not engage a gear. 100 Connector Views Fault Code 16 Isolation Procedures If the fault is active while driving the transmission it will remain in the current gear and then shift into the default gear once the vehicle comes to a stop. The will open at idle and will close if the throttle is depressed. The vehicle will move into the default start gear only. Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger Connector Views Harness Front View TECU - Vehicle Interface Connector 37 38 35 36 1 6 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 7 Harness Front View Push Button Shift Control Connector A B C D E F G H J K 1 2 3 A1 A3 K1 K3 TECU PBSC 27 28 F1 F2 HIL Low HIL High NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations 31 25 J3 C1 Shift Power (-) Shift Power (+) HIL Low HIL High Shift Power (-) Shift Power (+) 101 Fault Code 16 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Key on and observe the red push button Service lamp. If the red Service lamp turns on Go to STEP C If the red Service lamp does not turn on Go to STEP B STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Disconnect Shift Control 30-way connector. 2. Key on. 3. Measure voltage on 30-way connector pins J3 and C1 If voltage is within 0.6 volts of battery voltage Go to STEP C If out of range Go to STEP D STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Disconnect the 30-way Push Button Shift Control Connector. 3. Key on. 4. Connect Voltmeter leads to pins F1 and F2. If the voltage is 0.10 volts AC or greater Replace Push Button Shift Control (Only if Fault Code is Active). Go to STEP V Note: Make sure the volt/ohm meter is on the proper scale (around 10 volts AC). If the voltage is out of range Go to STEP F 102 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 16 Isolation Procedures STEP D Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Disconnect negative battery cable. 3. Disconnect Vehicle Harness 38-way connector. Note: On Peterbilt units, disconnect Gear Display. 4. Measure resistance between: Shift Control 30-way connector pin J3 and Vehicle Harness 38-way connector pin 25. If resistance between pins J3 and 25 is 0 to 0.3 ohms. Go to STEP E If any of the above conditions are not met Repair harness between the Shift Control and Transmission ECU. Go to STEP V STEP E Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Measure the resistance between: Shift Control 30-way connector pin C1 and Vehicle Harness 38-way connector pin 31. Shift Control 30-way connector pin C1 and ground. If resistance between pins C1 and 31 is 0 to 0.3 ohms and resistance between pin C1 and ground is 10K ohms or greater Replace Transmission ECU (Only if Fault Code is Active). Go to STEP V If any of the above conditions are not met Repair harness between the Transmission ECU and Shift Control. Go to STEP V 103 Fault Code 16 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP F Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Disconnect negative battery cable. 3. Disconnect Vehicle Harness 38-way connector. 4. Measure resistance between: Shift Control 30-way connector pin F1 and Vehicle Harness 38-way connector pin 28. Shift Control 30-way connector pin F1 and ground. If resistance between pins F1 and 28 is 0 to 0.3 ohms and if resistance between pin F1 and ground is 10K ohms or greater Go to STEP G If any of the above conditions are not met Repair harness between the Shift Control and Transmission ECU. Go to STEP V STEP G Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Measure resistance between: Shift Control 30-way connector pin F2 and Vehicle Harness 38-way connector pin 27. Shift Control 30-way connector pin F2 and ground. If resistance between pins F2 and 27 is 0 to 0.3 ohms and resistance between pin F2 and ground is 10K ohms or greater Replace Transmission ECU (Only if Fault Code is Active). Go to STEP V If any of the above conditions are not met Repair harness between the Shift Control and Transmission ECU. Go to STEP V 104 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 16 Isolation Procedures STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 16 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 16 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 105 Fault Code 17 Isolation Procedures Start Enable Relay Fault SA 3 SPN 626 MID 130 SID 237 FMI 3, 4 Overview The Start Enable Relay is wired into the Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) on the coil side of the relay. At key on, the HCM determines the starting method (High-Voltage Motor/ Generator, or Engine Starter) to use. If the HCM decides to use the standard engine starter, the 24-volt Cranking Relay is energized suppling battery power to the Start Enable Relay main feed, which then powers the starter solenoid. Conditions to Run Fault The Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 3 is set when the TECU detects an open or short to the vbatt in the control circuit of the Start Enable Relay for 1 second or greater. FMI 4 is set if the TECU detects a short to ground in the control circuit of the Start Enable Relay for 1 second or greater. Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25. Possible Causes FMI 3,4 - Loose or corroded connections, bent or burnt pins, short to ground, open, or short to vbatt on the circuit - Start Enable Relay - TECU Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 17 is set the following conditions will occur: The red Service lamp will display and an F will flash in the gear display. Fault is stored in TECU memory. If the fault sets at power-up the engine will still crank, provided the high-voltage batteries have a sufficient State of Charge (SOC). If the fault sets while driving, the vehicle will continue to operate. 106 Connector Views Fault Code 17 Isolation Procedures Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger Connector Views Front Harness View
Typical Relay Switch NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations 107 Fault Code 17 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Swap Start Enable Relay with another relay and see if fault returns If fault does not return with new relay Replace Start Enable Relay (Only if Fault Code is Active). Go to STEP V If fault returns with new relay Go to STEP B STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. What FMIs were listed from Step A? If FMI 3 is listed Go to STEP C If FMI 4 is listed Go to STEP E STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Disconnect negative battery cable. 3. Disconnect the Transmission Harness 38-way connector. 4. Measure resistance between Vehicle Harness 38-way connector pins 32 and 4 If resistance between 32 and 4 is 40-120 ohms Go to STEP D If resistance is outside of range Repair the vehicle harness for an open circuit. Go to STEP V 108 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 17 Isolation Procedures STEP D Procedure Condition Action 1. Key on. 2. Measure voltage between Vehicle Harness 38-way connector pin 32 and ground If the voltage between pin 32 and ground is 5 volts Replace the Transmission ECU (only if fault code is active). Go to STEP V Note: The voltage will only read 5 volts for 1-2 seconds. If the voltage between pin 32 and ground is 24 volts Repair the short to vbatt on the harness. Voltage should remain at 5 volts for 1-2 seconds after initial key on. Go to STEP V STEP E Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Disconnect battery cable. 3. Disconnect the Transmission Harness 38-way connector. 4. Measure the resistance between Vehicle Harness 38-way connector pins 32 and ground If the resistance between 32 and ground is 10K ohms or greater Replace the Transmission ECU (only if fault code is active). Go to STEP V If the resistance is outside of range Repair the vehicle harness for a short to ground. Go to STEP V 109 Fault Code 17 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 17 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 17 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 110 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 17 Isolation Procedures 111 Fault Code 18 Isolation Procedures ECA Communication Fault SA 239 SPN 520200 FMI 2, 9 Overview The Electric Clutch Actuator (ECA) controls the position of the clutch assembly. The ECA communicates with the Hybrid Control Module (HCM) over the proprietary Controller Area Network (CAN) data link to change position, show faults or include other operation information. Conditions to Run Fault The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. The ECA ignition voltage is greater than 8.5 volts. The HCM CAN data link error is not active. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 9 is set when the ECA looses communication on the CAN data link for 2 seconds. Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25. Possible Causes FMI 2, 9 - CAN data link from the ECA to the link - ECA Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 18 is set the following conditions will occur: The red Stop Hybrid lamp will display. Fault is stored in HCM memory. The ECA will either maintain current clutch position or move to the last position commanded by the HCM. Upon approaching idle the clutch will open and remain in this state. If the fault occurs at power-up, the vehicle will not crank. Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 112 Connector Views Fault Code 18 Isolation Procedures Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger Connector Views 27 28 2B 2A HCM ECA CAN - High (Vehicle) CAN - Low (Vehicle) CAN - High CAN - Low Harness Front View (HCM - Vehicle Interface Connector) 37 38 35 36 1 6 7 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 ECA 8-Way Harness Connector E A B C D H G F NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations 113 Fault Code 18 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. What FMIs are present If Fault Code 18 is active Go to Fault Code 19 procedure on page 115. If Fault Code 18 is not active Test complete. Go to STEP V STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 18 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 18 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 114 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 18 Isolation Procedures 115 Fault Code 19 Isolation Procedures CAN ECA Message Fault (HCM) SA 239 SPN 520273 FMI 2, 9 Overview Controller Area Network (CAN) is a high-speed twisted pair 500K proprietary data link with one 120 ohm resistor at each end of the link. The Hybrid Control Module (HCM) is connected to the CAN data link at the 38-way connector. This link is used to transmit information to the HCM as well as communicate or receive data from the other modules on the network like the Electric Clutch Actuator (ECA). Conditions to Run Fault The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. The HCM CAN Communication Link Fault is not active. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 9 is set when the HCM fails to receive ECA data (like clutch position) for 30 consecutive messages or greater, and it is still communicating with other modules on CAN. FMI 2 is only active in PDM and is set when the HCM does not receive 3 consecutive messages from the ECA. Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25. Possible Causes FMI 9, 2 - CAN data link - ECA Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 19 is set the following conditions will occur: The red Stop Hybrid lamp will display. Fault is stored in HCM memory. The operation mode will be changed to AutoShift Only mode. If the fault sets at power-up the engine will not crank. Electric motor/generator assist and regen are disabled, however, the high-voltage relays will remain powered. If the fault occurs while driving, the ECA will either maintain current clutch position or move to the last position commanded by the HCM. Transmission defaults start gear to 1st. 116 Connector Views Fault Code 19 Isolation Procedures Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit Digital Volt/Ohm Meter ServiceRanger Connector Views 27 28 2B 2A HCM ECA CAN - High (Vehicle) CAN - Low (Vehicle) CAN - High CAN - Low ECA 8-Way Connector E A B C D H G F Harness Front View (HCM - Vehicle Interface Connector) 37 38 35 36 1 6 7 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations 117 Fault Code 19 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Perform Electrical Pretest If no issues found during the Electrical Pretest Go to STEP B If issue was repaired during the Electrical Pretest Go to STEP V STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Disconnect negative battery cable. 3. Disconnect ECA 8-way connector. 4. Measure resistance between ECA 8-way connector pins A and B. If resistance between pin A and B is between 50-70 ohms Replace ECA. Go to STEP V Note: Make sure the volt/ohm meter is on the proper scale (around 200 ohm scale). If resistance is outside of range Repair CAN data link Harness. Go to STEP V 118 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 19 Isolation Procedures STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 19 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 19 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 119 Fault Code 22 Isolation Procedures J1939 ABS Message Fault (HCM) SA 239 SPN 563 FMI 2, 9, 14 Overview J1939 is a high-speed twisted pair 250K data link with one 120 ohm resistor at each end of the link. The HCM is connected to the J1939 data link at the 38-way connector. This link is used to transmit information to the HCM as well as communicate or receive data from the other modules on the network like the ABS module. Conditions to Run Fault The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. The J1939 data link communication fault is not active. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 9 is set when the HCM fails to receive ABS messages and there are no active J1939 faults. In PDM mode (FMI 2) this fault will be set if 3 consecutive messages (EBC1) are not received. FMI 14 is set when the HCM receives an active ABS signal (SPN563) out of range or the ABS Fully Operational Signal (SPN1243) is not present for 1 second. Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25. Possible Causes FMI 2, 9 - J1939 data link - ABS Module FMI 14 - ABS module configured to communicate on J1708 or analog instead of J1939. - ABS module reporting an active fault. Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 22 is set the following conditions will occur: The amber Check Hybrid lamp will display. Fault is stored in HCM memory. If the fault occurs while moving, the operation mode will go into AutoShift Only Mode. Electric Motor/Generator assist and regen are disabled, however, the high-voltage relays will remain powered. Transmission defaults start gear to 1st. 120 Connector Views Fault Code 22 Isolation Procedures Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit Digital Volt/Ohm Meter ServiceRanger Connector Views ABS HCM 2 J1939 Low J1939 Low Front Harness View (HCM - Vehicle Interface Connector) 37 38 35 36 1 6 7 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 3 J1939 High J1939 High NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations 121 Fault Code 22 Isolation Procedures Connector Views Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve the active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. What FMIs are present? If code 22 FMI 9 is listed Concern is either: 1. ABS Module 2. J1939 data link from ABS module to J1939 data link backbone. Refer to OEM for repair procedures. If code 22 FMI 14 is listed Concern is either: 1. ABS Module is configured for J1708 instead of J1939 communication 2. ABS module. Refer to OEM for repair procedure. 122 Connector Views Fault Code 22 Isolation Procedures 123 Fault Code 24 Isolation Procedures J1939 HCM Message Fault (TECU) SA 3 SPN 525 MID 130 SID 231 FMI 9 Overview The Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) communicates with the Hybrid Control Module over the J1939 data link during vehicle operation to exchange requested gear and current gear information. Conditions to Run Fault The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. No J1939 data link fault currently active in the TECU. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 9 is set when the TECU fails to receive transmission data (like requested gear) for 2 seconds on greater from the HCM, and it is still communicating with other modules on J1939. Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25. Possible Causes FMI 9 - J1939 data link - HCM Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 24 is set the following conditions will occur: The red Service lamp will display and an F and will flash in the gear display. Fault is stored in TECU memory. The operation mode will be changed to AutoShift Fallback mode. If the fault sets at power-up the engine will not crank. If the fault sets while driving, the vehicle will remain in current gear. When the vehicle comes to a stop the clutch will open and remain in this position. The amber Check Hybrid lamp may display on the dash due to an active fault code 48. 124 Connector Views Fault Code 24 Isolation Procedures Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger Connector Views Harness Front View (TECU - Vehicle Interface Connector) 37 38 35 36 1 6 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 7 TECU HCM 2 2 J1939 Low J1939 Low Harness Front View (HCM - Vehicle Interface Connector) 37 38 35 36 1 6 7 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 3 J1939 High 3 J1939 High NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations 125 Fault Code 24 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Perform Electrical Pretest If no issues found during the Electrical Pretest Go to STEP B If issue was repaired during the Electrical Pretest Go to STEP V STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Disconnect negative battery cable. 3. Disconnect HCM Vehicle Harness 38-way connector. 4. Measure resistance between HCM Vehicle Harness 38-way connector pin 2 and 3. If resistance between pin 2 and 3 is between 50-70 ohms Replace HCM. Go to STEP V Note: Make sure the volt/ohm meter is on the proper scale (around 200 ohm scale). If resistance is outside of range Repair J1939 Data link Harness. Go to STEP V 126 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 24 Isolation Procedures STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 24 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 24 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 127 Fault Code 26 Isolation Procedures Clutch Slip Fault SA 239 SPN 522 FMI 10 Overview The mechanical clutch assembly is controlled through the Electric Clutch Actuator (ECA) that is mounted on the clutch housing. The Hybrid Control Module (HCM) controls the ECA position and monitors several variables to determine if their is a slip concern in the clutch when it is in the closed position. Conditions to Run Fault The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. The ECA ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. There is no active fault code 18 or 19 present. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 10 is set when the gear position is not neutral, the clutch is in the engaged position and the difference between the transmission input shaft speed sensor and the engine speed is greater than 150 RPM for 1 second or longer. Note: A CA will appear if the clutch is allowed to slip and create heat beyond the a set point. Do not use the throttle as a hill hold device as it will cause clutch damage and a CA. Possible Causes FMI 10 - Clutch assembly Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 26 is set the following conditions will occur: The amber Check Hybrid lamp will display. Fault is stored in HCM memory. Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools ServiceRanger 128 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 26 Isolation Procedures Note: No Schematic for this Code. Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Is fault code 64 also active Yes Go to procedure for fault code 64 on page 223. No Go to STEP B STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Is fault code 27 FMI 13 also active Yes Go to procedure for fault code 27 FMI 13 on page 131. No Go to STEP C STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Key on. 2. Start engine. 3. Drive the vehicle under load in highest gear possible. At a steady speed, quickly and fully press and hold the throttle. If code 26 is active Replace Clutch. See CLMT-0365 for installation procedures. Go to STEP V If code 26 is not active Test is complete. Go to STEP V 129 Fault Code 26 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 26 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 26 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 130 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 26 Isolation Procedures 131 Fault Code 27 Isolation Procedures Clutch Disengagement Fault SA 239 SPN 788 FMI 7, 14 Overview The mechanical clutch assembly is controlled through the Electric Clutch Actuator (ECA) that is mounted on the clutch housing. The Hybrid Control Module (HCM) controls the ECA position and monitors several variables to determine if their is a slip concern in the clutch when it is in the closed position. Conditions to Run Fault The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. The ECA ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 7 is set when the set when engine torque is greater than 400 Nm, engine torque commanded is less than 0 for 0.3 seconds and the clutch position commanded is open for 1 second with the gear position confirmed in neutral. Or, if the clutch input speed is greater than 300 RPM, the clutch output speed is greater than 300 RPM, the clutch is commanded open for 1 second, and the selected gear is neutral with everything above being true for 10 seconds. FMI 14 is set when the HCM has commanded the ECA to disengage the clutch and the input shaft speed is greater than 315 RPM for more than 11 seconds with the transmission in neutral and the engine running. Possible Causes FMI 7 - Clutch Assembly - ECA FMI 14 - Clutch Assembly - Cross-shafts Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 27 is set the following conditions will occur: The red Stop Hybrid lamp will display for FMI 7. The amber Check Hybrid lamp will display for FMI 14. Fault is stored in HCM memory. If this fault occurs while driving, the vehicle will operate and the transmission will shift to neutral once the vehicle comes to a stop. 132 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 27 Isolation Procedures Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools ServiceRanger Note: No Schematic for this Code. Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. If fault code 64 is listed If fault code 27 FMI 7 or 14 are listed with an active fault code 64 Go to procedure for fault code 64 on page 223 If fault code 27 FMI 7 is listed with no active fault code 64 Go to STEP B If fault code 27 FMI 14 is listed with no active fault code 64 Go to STEP C STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Key on. 2. Start engine. 3. Launch vehicle and drive until 6th gear is obtained. Then slow down to a stop. 4. Repeat the launch 5 times. 5. Is FMI 7 active If FMI 7 is active Replace the Clutch. See CLMT0365 for installation procedure. Go to STEP V If FMI 7 is not active Test is complete. Go to STEP V 133 Fault Code 27 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Remove Electric Clutch Actuator from transmission housing. 3. Attempt to rotate the cross- shaft and yoke assembly by hand. If the cross-shaft assembly rotates by hand from the release bearing to the transmission case Replace the Clutch. See CLMT0365 for installation procedure. Go to STEP V If the cross-shaft assembly does not rotate by hand Replace the cross-shaft, bushings, and grease. Repeat STEP C STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 27 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 27 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 134 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 27 Isolation Procedures 135 Fault Code 32 Isolation Procedures Loss of Switched Ignition Power Fault (TECU) SA 3 SPN 43 MID 130 PID 43 FMI 2 Overview The Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) is mounted to the transmission and it contains all of the software to control the transmission operation, however, the Hybrid Control Module (HCM) controls the operation of the TECU during Hybrid operation. Ignition powers is fused and provided from the key switch. Application of this input initiates the power-up sequence. Conditions to Run Fault Output Shaft Speed must be greater than 0 RPM. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 2 is set when the TECU looses ignition power during operation for 2 seconds or greater. Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) See page 25. Possible Causes FMI 2 - Ignition power supply to TECU - TECU Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 32 is set the following conditions will occur: The red 'Service lamp will display and an F will flash in the gear display. Fault is stored in TECU memory. The operation mode will be changed to AutoShift Fallback Mode. If the fault sets at power-up the engine will not crank. If the fault sets while driving, the vehicle will remain in the current gear and the clutch will open when the vehicle approaches an idle. The default start gear will be engaged and the clutch will close if the throttle is depressed. No lamps will be illuminated on the Push Button if the fault occurs prior to power-up or while in neutral. Only the current mode lamp will be illuminated if the fault occurs while driving. The Push Button will start to tone when the vehicle approaches a stop and continue until power is returned. 136 Connector Views Fault Code 32 Isolation Procedures Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger Connector Views TECU 30 86 87 85 87 86 85 30 35 Ignition
P l u s NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations Front View
(TECU - Vehicle Interface Connector)
37 38 35 36 1 6 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 7 137 Fault Code 32 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Perform Electrical Pretest If code 32 is active after performing Electrical Pretest Replace TECU (only if fault code is active). Go to STEP V If code 32 is inactive after performing the Electrical Pretest Clear Codes. Go to STEP V STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 32 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 32 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 138 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 32 Isolation Procedures 139 Fault Code 33 Isolation Procedures Low Battery Voltage Fault (TECU) SA 3 SPN 168 MID 130 PID 168 FMI 4 Overview The Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) is mounted to the transmission and it contains all of the software to control the transmission operation, however, the Hybrid Control Module (HCM) controls the operation of the TECU during normal Hybrid Mode operation. The HCM main battery power is a 24-volt feed that is fused and runs through the HCM 38-way vehicle connector with the main ground wire returning to the battery negative terminal. Conditions to Run Fault The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 4 is set when the TECU battery voltage drops below 7 volts for more than 1 second. Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25. Possible Causes FMI 4 has several areas that may cause this fault. - Power Supply to TECU - Low batteries or bad main power connection - Charging system - TECU Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 33 is set the following conditions will occur: Fault is stored in TECU memory. TECU switches to AutoShift Fallback mode. No lamps are illuminated on the Push Button. If this fault occurs prior to power-up, the vehicle will not crank. If this fault occurs while driving, the vehicle will maintain the current gear and the clutch will open when the vehicle comes to a stop. 140 Connector Views Fault Code 33 Isolation Procedures Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger Connector Views TECU 24V Truck Battery 24V Plus 38 TECU Power NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations 36 TECU Ground Front View
(TECU - Vehicle Interface Connector)
37 38 35 36 1 6 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 7 Ground 141 Fault Code 33 Isolation Procedures Isolation Procedures Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Perform Electrical Pretest. If code 33 is active after performing the Electrical Pretest Replace TECU (only if Fault Code is active). Go to STEP V If code 33 is inactive after performing the Electrical Pretest Clear codes. Go to STEP V STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 33 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 33 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 142 Isolation Procedures Fault Code 33 Isolation Procedures 143 Fault Code 34 Isolation Procedures Weak Battery Voltage Fault (TECU) SA 3 SPN 168 MID 130 PID 168 FMI 14 Overview The Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) is mounted to the transmission and it contains all of the software to control the transmission operation, however, the Hybrid Control Module (HCM) controls the operation of the TECU during normal Hybrid Mode operation. The HCM main battery power is a 24-volt feed that is fused and runs through the HCM 38-way vehicle connector with the main ground wire returning to the battery negative terminal. Conditions to Run Fault The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. The TECU System Battery Voltage Low Fault is not active. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 14 is set when the TECU battery voltage drops below 9 volts for 10 seconds. Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25. Possible Causes FMI 14 has several areas that may cause this fault. - Power supply to TECU - Low batteries or bad main power connection - Charging system - TECU Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 34 is set the following conditions will occur: Fault is stored in TECU memory. TECU switches to AutoShift Fallback mode. If this fault occurs while moving, it causes a 1-speed fallback. If the vehicle is stopped, the starting gear and reverse can be engaged. 144 Connector Views Fault Code 34 Isolation Procedures Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger Connector Views TECU 24V Truck Battery 24V Plus 38 TECU Power NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations 36 TECU Ground Front View
(TECU - Vehicle Interface Connector)
37 38 35 36 1 6 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 7 Ground 145 Fault Code 34 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Perform Electrical Pretest. If code 34 is active after performing the Electrical Pretest Replace TECU (only if Fault Code is active). Go to STEP V If code 34 is inactive after performing the Electrical Pretest Clear codes. Go to STEP V STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 34 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 34 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 146 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 34 Isolation Procedures 147 Fault Code 35 Isolation Procedures J1939 Communication Link Fault (TECU) SA 3 SPN 639 MID 130 SID 231 FMI 2 Overview J1939 is a high-speed twisted pair 250K data link with one 120 ohm resistor at each end of the link. The Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) is connected to the J1939 data link at the 38-way connector. This link is used to transmit information to the Hybrid Control Module (HCM) as well as communicate or receive data from the other modules on the network like the engine Engine Control Module (ECM). Conditions to Run Fault The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. The TECU Battery Voltage Low fault is not active. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 2 is set when the TECU looses communication will all modules on the J1939 data link for 5 seconds or greater. Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25. Possible Causes FMI 2 - J1939 data link - TECU Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 35 is set the following conditions will occur: The red Service lamp will display and an F will flash in the gear display. Fault is stored in TECU memory. The operation mode will change to AutoShift Fallback mode. If the fault sets at power-up the engine will not crank. If the fault sets while driving, the vehicle will remain in current gear and the clutch will open once vehicle speed approaches idle. 148 Connector Views Fault Code 35 Isolation Procedures Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger Connector Views Front Harness View (TECU - Vehicle Interface Connector) 37 38 35 36 1 6 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 7 TECU D 9 Pin Diagnostic Connector 3 J1939 High TECU C 2 J1939 Low TECU J1939 High J1939 Low 9 Pin Diagnostic Connector NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations 149 Fault Code 35 Isolation Procedures Isolation Procedures Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Key on. 3. Select the Vehicle Components screen and view the various modules that are reporting on the J1939 link If TECU is not reporting on J1939, but the HCM is listed Go to STEP B If the HCM and TECU are not reporting on J1939 Go to STEP C STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Disconnect negative battery cable. 3. Disconnect TECU Vehicle Harness 38-way connector. 4. Measure resistance between TECU Vehicle Harness 38-way connector pin 2 and 3. 5. Make sure the volt/ohm meter is on the proper scale (around 200 ohm scale). If resistance between pin 2 and 3 is between 50-70 ohms Replace TECU. Go to STEP V If resistance is outside of range Repair the J1939 Data link Harness. Go to STEP V 150 Isolation Procedures Fault Code 35 Isolation Procedures STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Measure resistance between the diagnostic connector 9-way pins C and D. If resistance between pin C and D is between 50-70 ohms Go to STEP D If resistance is 70 ohms or greater One or more of the terminating resistors on the J1939 data link harness is missing or out of range, or there is an open in the link. Go to STEP V If resistance is 50 ohms or less There is an additional terminating resistor present. Repair the OEM J1939 data link harness. Go to STEP V STEP D Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Measure the resistance between the following 9-way diagnostic connector pins: C to ground D to ground If resistance between pin C to ground and D to ground are both 10K ohms or greater Attempt to communicate with another vehicle to ensure ServiceRanger is working. If ServiceRanger fails to communicate with another vehicle, call 1-800-826-HELP (4357). If resistance is outside of range Repair J1939 Data link Harness for a short to ground. Go to STEP V 151 Fault Code 35 Isolation Procedures Isolation Procedures STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 35 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 35 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 152 Isolation Procedures Fault Code 35 Isolation Procedures 153 Fault Code 36 Isolation Procedures J1939 Engine Message Faults SA 3 SPN 639 MID 130 SID 231 FMI 14 Overview J1939 is a high-speed twisted pair 250K data link with one 120 ohm resistor at each end of the link. The Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) is connected to the J1939 data link at the 38-way connector. This link is used to transmit information to the Hybrid Control Module (HCM) as well as communicate or receive data from the other modules on the network like the engine Engine Control Module (ECM). Conditions to Run Fault The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. The TECU Battery Voltage Low fault is not active. The TECU J1939 data link fault is not active. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 14 is set when the TECU fails to receive engine ECM data like engine torque for 5 seconds or greater, and it is still communicating with other modules on J1939. Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25. Possible Causes FMI 14 - J1939 data link - ECM Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 36 is set the following conditions will occur: The red Service lamp will display and an F will flash in the gear display. Fault is stored in TECU memory. If the fault occurs while moving, the TECU will go into AutoShift Fallback Mode. Once the vehicle stops, start and reverse gears can be selected and the transmission will operate in AutoSelect mode. If the fault occurs at power-up, the vehicle will crank. 154 Connector Views Fault Code 36 Isolation Procedures Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit Digital Volt/Ohm Meter ServiceRanger Connector Views Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. If code 36 is active Concern is either: 1. Engine ECM 2. data link from Engine ECM to J1939 data link backbone. Refer to OEM for repair procedure. If code 36 is inactive Test complete. Front View (TECU - Vehicle Interface Connector) 37 38 35 36 1 6 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 7 TECU Engine ECM 3 J1939 High TECU 2 J1939 Low TECU (refer to OEM engine wiring diagram for pin outs) NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations 155 Fault Code 37 Isolation Procedures Power Supply Fault (TECU) SA 3 SPN 610 MID 130 SID 251 FMI 5 Overview The Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) is mounted to the transmission and it contains all of the software to control the transmission operation, however, the Hybrid Control Module (HCM) controls the operation of the TECU during normal Hybrid Mode operation. The TECU main battery power is a 24-volt feed that is fused and runs through the TECU 38-way vehicle connector with the main ground wire returning to the battery negative terminal. Conditions to Run Fault The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. The TECU will only run this test if the electric shifter is being cycled from N to gear. Note: Changing the start gear from N will allow this test to run. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 5 is set when the TECU power supply resistance is measured before and during an electric shifter test and the results show a measurement of 0.4 ohms or greater. Possible Causes FMI 5 - Power supply to TECU - Low batteries or bad main power connection - Broken or corroded battery interconnect straps may also be the cause of high resistance readings Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 37 is set the following conditions will occur: Fault is stored in TECU memory. Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. 156 Connector Views Fault Code 37 Isolation Procedures Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger Connector Views Front View
(TECU - Vehicle Interface Connector)
37 38 35 36 1 6 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 7 TECU 24V Battery Negative (-) 38 TECU Power Positive (+) NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations 36 TECU Ground 4-Pin Diagnostics Port 4-way B - Service Bat. + C - Service Bat. - A - Service Ignition +
B A D C 4-Pin Diagnostic Port (Located at the left rear corner of the transmission.) Warning! - Do Not Load Test at Diagnostic Port 157 Fault Code 37 Isolation Procedures Isolation Procedures Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Perform Electrical Pretest. If code 37 is active after performing the Electrical Pretest Go to STEP B If code 37 is inactive after performing the Electrical Pretest Clear codes. Go to STEP V STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Locate diagnostic port on transmission harness 2. Key on. 3. Measure voltage between pins C and the battery negative post If voltage between pin C and battery negative post is 0.7 volts or less Go to STEP C If voltage is outside of range Repair battery ground supply to transmission ECU. Go to STEP V STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Locate diagnostic port on Transmission Harness. 2. Key on. 3. Measure voltage between pins B and pin C. If voltage between pins B and C is within 0.6 volts of battery voltage Go to STEP D If voltage is outside of range Repair battery power supply to Transmission ECU. Fuse may be blown. Repeat test. 158 Isolation Procedures Fault Code 37 Isolation Procedures STEP D Procedure Condition Action 1. Key on. 2. Measure voltage between pin A and pin C. If voltage between pins A and C is within 0.6 volts of battery voltage Go to STEP E If voltage is outside of range Repair Ignition power supply to ECU. Fuse may be blown. Repeat test. STEP E Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Disconnect negative battery cable. 3. Disconnect the Vehicle Harness 38-way. 4. Inspect main power 38-way connector terminals pin 36 and 38, in-line fuse holder, and power supply connections for integrity and corrosion. If no problem found Go to STEP V If problem is found Repair power/ground path for the main power supply. Go to STEP V 159 Fault Code 37 Isolation Procedures Isolation Procedures STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 37 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 37 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 160 Isolation Procedures Fault Code 37 Isolation Procedures 161 Fault Code 38 Isolation Procedures Battery Fan Relay Fault SA 239 SPN 520243 FMI 3, 4, 5, 14 Overview The Battery Fan Relay is a normally open relay that is connected to the Hybrid Control Module (HCM) on the control side. When the HCM wants to turn on the relay it powers the control circuit, which closes the relay contacts. The relay powers the Battery Fan located in the Power Electronics Carrier (PEC), which provides the cooling for the high-voltage batteries. Conditions to Run Fault The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 3 is set when the HCM detects a short to battery in the in the coil circuit of the battery fan relay. FMI 4 is set when the HCM detects a short to ground in the coil circuit of the battery fan relay. FMI 5 is set when the HCM detects an open in the coil circuit of the battery fan relay. FMI 14 is set when the following conditions are true for 10 minutes; the high-voltage battery temperature is greater than 55C, the difference between the minimum and maximum battery temperatures is less than 1C, and there are no battery temperature faults from the Battery Control Module. Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25. Possible Causes FMI 3, 4, 5 - Vehicle harness from HCM to Battery Fan Relay - Battery Fan Relay - HCM FMI 14 - Battery Fan Relay - Battery Fan - Plugged Air Filter - Battery Fan Relay main power supply Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 38 is set the following conditions will occur: The amber Check Hybrid lamp will display. Fault is stored in HCM memory. 162 Connector Views Fault Code 38 Isolation Procedures Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit Digital Volt/Ohm Meter ServiceRanger Connector Views HCM 30 86 87 85 26 86 87 85 30 Battery Fan
Typical Relay Switch Battery Fan Relay 24V Truck Battery 2 4 V
P l u s 4 Battery Fan Return PEC 12 Ground 14 Battery Fan Supply Cooling Fan Plus Cooling Fan Minus Front Harness View (HCM - Hybrid System Interface Connector)
37 38 35 36 1 6 7 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations Harness Connector View (PEC 19 - Way) 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 163 Fault Code 38 Isolation Procedures Isolation Procedures Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Follow Hybrid Shutdown Procedure found at front of book to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage. 3. Change battery fan relay with another relay to see if fault returns If fault does not return with new relay Replace the battery fan relay. Go to STEP V If fault returns with new relay Go to STEP B STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. What FMIs were listed in Step A? Note: The Battery Fan Relay must be wired according to Eaton requirements (shown on previous page) for this test to work properly. If wired differently, consult OEM for correct wiring schematic. If FMI 5 is listed Go to STEP C If FMI 3 is listed Go to STEP D If FMI 4 is listed Go to STEP E If FMI 14 is listed Go to STEP F WARNING 164 Isolation Procedures Fault Code 38 Isolation Procedures STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Disconnect negative battery cable 3. Disconnect the HCM harness 38-way connector 4. Measure the resistance between the HCM System Harness 38-way connector pins 26 and 4. If the resistance between pins 26 and 4 is 40-120 ohms Replace HCM (Only if Fault Code is Active). Go to STEP V If the resistance is outside the range Repair the Vehicle Harness for an open circuit. Go to STEP V STEP D Procedure Condition Action 1. Key on. 2. Measure voltage between HCM System Harness 38-way connector pins 26 and ground at key on If voltage between pin 26 and ground is 0 volts Replace the HCM (only is fault code is active). Go to STEP V If voltage between pin 26 and ground is 24 volts Repair the short to vbatt on the harness. Go to STEP V STEP E Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Disconnect negative battery cable. 3. Disconnect the HCM harness 38-way connector. 4. Measure the resistance between HCM System Harness 38-way connector pins 26 and ground If resistance between pin 26 and ground is 10K ohms or greater Replace HCM (Only if Fault Code is Active). Go to STEP V If resistance is outside of range Repair the Vehicle Harness for a short to ground. Go to STEP V 165 Fault Code 38 Isolation Procedures Isolation Procedures STEP F Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Remove and inspect the Air filter on the PEC inlet and the exhaust screen on the PEC outlet. If the air filter and screen are clean and free from debris Go to STEP G If the air filter is dirty or the exhaust screen is plugged Replace the Air Filter and clean the Exhaust Screen. Go to STEP V STEP G Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Connect ServiceRanger to the 9-pin diagnostic connector in the cab. 3. Key on. 4. Go to Product Tests and select Battery Fan Relay. If airflow can be felt from the PEC air inlet and exhaust If Fault Code is Active contact Eaton at 1-800-826-4357. If airflow can not be felt from the PEC air inlet and exhaust Go to STEP H STEP H Procedure Condition Action 1. Key on. 2. Disconnect the 19-way connector at the PEC. 3. Measure voltage at the 19- way connector from pin 12 to pin 14. If voltage between pins 12 and 14 is +/- 0.2 volts of battery voltage Replace the PEC Fan. Go to STEP V If voltage between pins 12 and 14 is outside of range Repair wiring or relay problem. Refer to OEM. 166 Isolation Procedures Fault Code 38 Isolation Procedures STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 38 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 38 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 167 Fault Code 39 Isolation Procedures Heat Exchanger Relay Fault SA 239 SPN 520247 FMI 3, 4, 5 Overview The Heat Exchanger Fan Relay is normally an open relay that is connected to the Hybrid Control Module (HCM) on the control side. When the HCM wants to turn on the relay it powers the control circuit, which closes the relay contacts. The relay powers the Heat Exchanger Fan located on the hybrid liquid cooling system radiator. The fan is used to provide additional airflow in certain situations like slow driving or ePTO operation. Conditions to Run Fault The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 3 is set when the HCM detects a short to battery in the coil circuit of the Heat Exchanger Fan Relay. FMI 4 is set when the HCM detects a short to ground in the coil circuit of the Heat Exchanger Fan Relay. FMI 5 is set when the HCM detects an open in the coil circuit of the Heat Exchanger Fan Relay. Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25. Possible Causes FMI 3,4,5 - Vehicle harness from HCM to Heat Exchanger Relay - Heat Exchanger Relay - HCM - Heat Exchanger Relay Fuse Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 39 is set the following conditions will occur: The amber Check Hybrid lamp will display Fault is stored in HCM memory Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. 168 Connector Views Fault Code 39 Isolation Procedures Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit Digital Volt/Ohm Meter ServiceRanger Connector Views HCM 30 86 87 85 35 86 87 85 30 Heat Exchange Fan HSD
Typical Relay Switch Heat Exchanger Fan Relay 24V Truck Battery 2 4 V
P l u s 37 Heat Exchange Fan LSD Heat Exchanger Fan A Ground B HEF Supply HEF Plus HEF Minus Harness Front View (HCM - Hybrid System Interface Connector)
37 38 35 36 1 6 7 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations HEF Plus Fuse 169 Fault Code 39 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Change heat exchanger fan relay with another relay and see if the fault returns If fault does not return with new relay Replace the Heat Exchanger Fan Relay. Go to STEP V If fault returns with new relay Go to STEP B STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Key on. 2. Connect ServiceRanger to the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 3. Select Configurations menu and pick the Hybrid Control Module option. 4. Is there an option for Heat Exchanger Fan The Heat Exchanger Fan option is shown and the vehicle has the Hybrid cooling system heat exchanger fan installed Go to STEP C The Heat Exchanger Fan option is shown and the vehicle does not have the Hybrid cooling system heat exchanger fan installed Write down the model number on the transmission tag and contact Eaton at 1-800-826-HELP (4357). 170 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 39 Isolation Procedures STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. What FMIs were listed from Step A? Note: The heat exchanger fan relay must be wired according to Eaton requirements (shown on previous page) for this test to work properly. If wired differently consult OEM for correct wiring schematic. If FMI 5 is listed Go to STEP D If FMI 3 is listed Go to STEP E If FMI 4 is listed Go to STEP F STEP D Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Disconnect negative battery cable 3. Disconnect the HCM System Harness 38-way connector. 4. Measure the resistance between HCM System Harness 38-way connector pins 35 and 37 If resistance between pins 35 and 37 is 40 - 120 ohms Replace the HCM (only if fault code is active). Go to STEP V If resistance is outside of range Repair the Vehicle Harness for an open circuit or blown fuse. Go to STEP V STEP E Procedure Condition Action 1. Key on. 2. Measure the voltage between HCM system harness 38-way connector pins 35 and ground If voltage between pin 35 and ground is 0 volts Replace the HCM (only if fault code is active). Go to STEP V If voltage between pin 35 and ground is 24 volts Repair the short to vbatt on the harness. Go to STEP V 171 Fault Code 39 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP F Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Disconnect negative battery cable 3. Disconnect the HCM System Harness 38-way connector. 4. Measure the resistance between HCM System Harness 38-way connector pins 35 and ground If resistance between pins 35 and ground is 10K ohms or greater Replace the HCM (only if fault code is active). Go to STEP V If resistance is outside of range Repair the Vehicle Harness for a short to ground. Go to STEP V STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 39 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 39 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 172 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 39 Isolation Procedures 173 Fault Code 40 Isolation Procedures Cooling Pump Relay Fault SA 239 SPN 520248 FMI 3, 4, 5, 14 Overview The Cooling Pump Relay is normally an open relay that is connected to the Hybrid Control Module (HCM) on the control side. When the HCM wants to turn on the relay it powers the control circuit, which closes the relay contacts. The relay powers the Cooling Pump that circulates the coolant on the hybrid liquid system. Conditions to Run Fault The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 3 is set when the HCM detects a short to battery in the coil circuit of the Cooling Pump Relay. FMI 4 is set when the HCM detects a short to ground in the coil circuit of the Cooling Pump Relay. FMI 5 is set when the HCM detects an open in the coil circuit of the Cooling Pump Relay. FMI 14 is set when the following occur for 10 minutes or longer; the Inverter temperature is greater than 50C, the difference between the maximum battery temperature and the Inverter temperature is greater than 20C, and there are no battery temperature or motor temperature faults. Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25. Possible Causes FMI 3,4,5 - Vehicle harness from HCM to Cooling Pump Relay - Cooling Pump Relay - HCM FMI 14 - Cooling Pump Relay - Cooling Pump - Cooling Pump Relay main power supply - Low Coolant, Low Coolant Flow, Plugged Radiator, Fan Operation Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code is set the following conditions will occur: The amber Check Hybrid lamp will display. Fault is stored in HCM memory. 174 Connector Views Fault Code 40 Isolation Procedures Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit Digital Volt/Ohm Meter ServiceRanger Connector Views HCM 30 86 87 85 32 86 87 85 30 Coolant Pump
P l u s 4 Coolant Pump Return Coolant Pump A Ground B Coolant Pump Supply Coolant Pump Plus Coolant Pump Minus Harness Front View (HCM - Hybrid System Interface Connector)
37 38 35 36 1 6 7 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations 175 Fault Code 40 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Follow Hybrid Shutdown Procedure found at front of book to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage. 3. Change cooling pump relay with another relay and see if fault returns If fault does not return with new relay Replace the cooling pump relay. Go to STEP V If fault returns with new relay Go to STEP B STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. What FMIs were listed from Step A? Note: The Cooling Pump Relay must be wired according to Eaton requirements (shown on previous page) for this test to work properly. If wired differently, consult OEM for correct wiring schematic. If FMI 5 is listed Go to STEP C If FMI 3 is listed Go to STEP D If FMI 4 is listed Go to STEP E If FMI 14 is listed Go to STEP F WARNING 176 Fault Code 40 Isolation Procedures STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Disconnect negative battery cable. 3. Disconnect the HCM System Harness 38-way connector. 4. Measure the resistance between the HCM System Harness 38-way connector pins 32 and 4 If resistance between 32 and 4 is 40-120 ohms Replace HCM (Only if Fault Code is Active). Go to STEP V If resistance is outside of range Repair the Vehicle Harness for an open circuit. Go to STEP V STEP D Procedure Condition Action 1. Key on. 2. Measure voltage between HCM system harness 38-way connector pin 32 and ground at key on If voltage between pin 32 and ground is 0 volts Replace the HCM (only if fault code is active). Go to STEP V If voltage between pin 32 and ground is 24 volts Repair the short to vbatt on the harness. Go to STEP V STEP E Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Disconnect negative battery cable. 3. Disconnect the HCM system harness 38-way connector. 4. Measure the resistance between the HCM system harness 38-way connector pins 32 and ground If resistance between pin 32 and ground is 10K ohms or greater Replace the HCM (only if fault code is active). Go to STEP V If resistance is outside of range Repair the vehicle harness for a short to ground. Go to STEP V 177 Fault Code 40 Isolation Procedures STEP F Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Note the level of the coolant in the Hybrid Liquid Cooling System. If the coolant is within the recommended limits. Go to STEP G If the coolant is below the recommended limits. Refer to OEM for coolant type and fill procedure. Go to STEP V STEP G Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Connect ServiceRanger to the 9-pin diagnostic connector in the cab. 3. Key on. 4. Go to Product Tests and select Coolant Pump Relay. 5. Listen for the Coolant Pump to turn on and watch for coolant flow in the reservoir. If the coolant pump runs and coolant is moving through the reservoir. If Fault Code is Active contact Eaton at 1-800-826-4357. If the coolant pump does not run Go to STEP H If the coolant pump does run and coolant does not flow Check for kinks or sharp bends in the coolant lines. If okay contact OEM for concerns with coolant pump. STEP H Procedure Condition Action 1. Key on. 2. Disconnect the 2-way connector at the Coolant Pump. 3. Measure voltage at the 2-way connector from pin A to B. If voltage between pins A and B is +/- 0.2 volts of battery voltage. Refer to OEM for Coolant Pump problem. If voltage between pins A and B is outside of range. Repair wiring or relay problem. Refer to OEM. 178 Fault Code 40 Isolation Procedures STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 40 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 40 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 179 Fault Code 48 Isolation Procedures J1939 Transmission Message Fault (HCM) SA 239 SPN 523 FMI 2, 9 Overview J1939 is a high-speed twisted pair 250K data link with one 120 ohm resistor at each end of the link. The Hybrid Control Module (HCM) is connected to the J1939 data link at the 38-way connector. This link is used to transmit information to the HCM as well as communicate or receive data from the other modules on the network like the Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU). Conditions to Run Fault The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. The J1939 data link communication fault is not active. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 9 is set when the HCM fails to receive TECU data (like current gear) for 30 consecutive messages or greater, and it is still communicating with other modules on J1939. Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25. Possible Causes FMI 2, 9 - J1939 data link - TECU Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 48 is set the following conditions will occur: The amber Check Hybrid lamp will display. Fault is stored in HCM memory. The red Service lamp may display and a F may flash in the gear display due to an active fault code 24. The operation mode is changed to AutoShift Only mode. Electric motor/generator assist and regen are disabled, however, the high-voltage relays will remain powered. If the fault sets at power-up the engine will not crank. If the fault sets while driving, the vehicle will shift, however, when the vehicle comes to a stop the clutch will open and remain in the open position. Transmission defaults start gear to 1st. 180 Connector Views Fault Code 48 Isolation Procedures Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit Digital Volt/Ohm Meter ServiceRanger Connector Views Harness Front View (TECU - Vehicle Interface Connector) 37 38 35 36 1 6 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 7 TECU HCM 2 2 J1939 Low J1939 Low Harness Front View (HCM - Vehicle Interface Connector) 37 38 35 36 1 6 7 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 3 J1939 High 3 J1939 High NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations 181 Fault Code 48 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Disconnect negative battery cable. 3. Disconnect TECU Vehicle Harness 38-way connector. 4. Measure the resistance between the TECU Vehicle Harness 38-way connector pin 2 and 3. If resistance between pin 2 and 3 is between 50 to 70 ohms. Replace TECU. Go to STEP V Note: Make sure the volt/ohm meter is on the proper scale (around 200 ohm scale). If resistance is outside of range. Repair J1939 Data link Harness. Go to STEP V STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 48 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 48 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 182 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 48 Isolation Procedures 183 Fault Code 49 Isolation Procedures J1939 Engine Message Fault (HCM) SA 239 SPN 190 FMI 2, 9 Overview J1939 is a high-speed twisted pair 250K data link with one 120 ohm resistor at each end of the link. The Hybrid Control Module (HCM) is connected to the J1939 data link at the 38-way connector. This link is used to transmit information to the HCM as well as communicate or receive data from the other modules on the network like the Engine Control Module (ECM). Conditions to Run Fault The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. The J1939 data link communication fault is not active Conditions to Set Fault FMI 9 is set when the HCM fails to receive Engine ECM data (like engine torque) for 30 consecutive messages or greater, and it is still communicating with other modules on J1939. Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25. Possible Causes FMI 9 - J1939 data link from Engine ECM - ECM Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 49 is set the following conditions will occur: The amber Check Hybrid lamp will display. Fault is stored in HCM memory. The operation mode will be changed to AutoShift Only mode. Electric motor/generator assist and regen are disabled, however, the high-voltage relays will remain powered. Transmission defaults start gear to 1st. Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. 184 Connector Views Fault Code 49 Isolation Procedures Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit Digital Volt/Ohm Meter ServiceRanger Connector Views Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. If code 49 is active Concern is either: 1. Engine ECM 2. Data link from Engine ECM to J1939 data link backbone. Refer to OEM for repair procedure. If code 49 is inactive Test complete. ECM HCM 2 J1939 Low J1939 Low Harness Front View (HCM - Vehicle Interface Connector) 37 38 35 36 1 6 7 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 3 J1939 High J1939 High NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations 185 Fault Code 50 Isolation Procedures J1939 Body Controller Message Fault (HCM) SA 239 SPN 701 FMI 2, 9 Overview J1939 is a high-speed twisted pair 250K data link with one 120 ohm resistor at each end of the link. The Hybrid Control Module (HCM) is connected to the J1939 data link at the 38-way connector. This link is used to transmit information to the HCM as well as communicate or receive data from the other modules on the network like the Body Controller. Conditions to Run Fault The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. The J1939 data link communication fault is not active. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 2 is set when the HCM is in PDM mode and fails to receive messages from the body controller for 1 second. FMI 9 is set when the HCM fails to receive messages from the body controller for seconds. Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25. Possible Causes FMI 2, 9 - J1939 data link - Body Controller Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 50 is set the following conditions will occur: No hybrid lamps are lit when this code is active. Fault is stored in HCM memory HCM disables ePTO operation, since parameters like hydraulic demand are unavailable Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. 186 Connector Views Fault Code 50 Isolation Procedures Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit Digital Volt/Ohm Meter ServiceRanger Connector Views Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. If code 50 is active Concern is either: a. Body Controller b. Data link from Body Controller to J1939 data link backbone. Refer to OEM for repair procedure. If code 50 is inactive Test complete. Body Controller HCM 2 J1939 Low J1939 Low Harness Front View (HCM - Vehicle Interface Connector) 37 38 35 36 1 6 7 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 3 J1939 High J1939 High NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations 187 Fault Code 51 Isolation Procedures Rail Position Sensor Fault SA 3 SPN 60 MID 130 PID 60 FMI 2, 3, 4, 10 Overview The Rail Position Sensor is a Hall Effect position sensor that provides feedback on the position of the shift finger. The Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) delivers a constant 5 volt reference to one terminal of the Rail Position Sensor. The signal output from sensor provides a regulated voltage signal from 0.5 volts to 4.5 volts. The last terminal provides a ground for the Rail Position Sensor to the TECU. Conditions to Run Fault The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. FMIs 3 and 4 will not be set if the TECU System Battery Voltage Low Fault is active. FMI 2 will not set if FMI 3,4 is active. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 2 sets when the transmission controller detects the rail sensor voltage is above 4.5 volts or below 0.5 volts for 1 second of longer. FMI 3 sets when the transmission controller detects the rail sensor supply voltage is 5% above the expected supply voltage for 1 second or longer. FMI 4 set when the transmission controller detects the rail sensor supply voltage is 5% below the expected supply voltage for 1 second or longer. FMI 10 (refer to troubleshooting guide TRTS0930) Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25. Possible Causes FMI 2, 10 - Transmission Harness - Rail Position Sensor - TECU FMIs 3, 4 - TECU Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 51 is set the following conditions will occur: 188 Connector Views Fault Code 51 Isolation Procedures The red Service lamp will display and an F will flash in the gear display. Fault is stored in TECU memory. If this fault occurs while moving, the transmission will remain in the current gear and the clutch will open when the vehicle comes to a stop. The operation mode will be changed to AutoShift Fallback Mode. Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit Digital Volt/Ohm Meter ServiceRanger Connector Views Harness Front View (TECU - System Interface Connector) 37 38 35 36 1 6 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 7 B A C Rail Position Sensor Pins TECU 20 18 19 Rail Position Sensor Hall Effect B C A C A B Rail Position Plus Rail Position Signal Rail Position Minus E: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locat 189 Fault Code 51 Isolation Procedures Isolation Procedures Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Key off. 3. What FMIs are present If FMI 3 or 4 is listed Replace the TECU. Go to STEP V If FMI 2, 10 is listed Go to STEP B STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Disconnect negative battery cable. 3. Disconnect the Transmission Harness 38-way connector. 4. Measure resistance between the Transmission Harness 38-way connector pins: 18 to 19 18 to 20 Note: An Auto Ranging Digital Volt/Ohm Meter must be used. If pin 18 and 19 resistance is 100 to 200 ohms and if pin 18 and 20 resistance is 5K to 7K ohms Go to STEP C If any of the above conditions are not met Go to STEP D STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Measure resistance between Transmission Harness 38-way connector pin 18 to ground. If resistance is 10K ohms or greater Replace TECU (Only if Fault Code is Active). Go to STEP V If resistance is less than 10K ohms Go to STEP D 190 Isolation Procedures Fault Code 51 Isolation Procedures STEP D Procedure Condition Action 1. Disconnect Transmission Harness from Rail Select Sensor. 2. Measure resistance between Rail Select Sensor pins: A to C A to B Note: An Auto Ranging Digital Volt/Ohm Meter must be used. If pin A and C resistance is 5K to 7K and if pin A and B resistance is 100 to 200 ohms Replace the transmission harness. Go to STEP V If any to the above conditions are not met Replace Electric Shifter. Go to STEP V STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 51 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 51 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 191 Fault Code 52 Isolation Procedures Gear Position Sensor Fault SA 3 SPN 59 MID 130 PID 59 FMI 2, 3, 4 Overview The Rail Position Sensor is a Hall Effect position sensor that provides feedback on the position of the shift finger. The Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) delivers a constant 5 volt reference to one terminal of the Rail Position Sensor. The signal output from sensor provides a regulated voltage signal from 0.5 volts to 4.5 volts. The last terminal provides a ground for the Rail Position Sensor to the TECU. Conditions to Run Fault The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. FMI 3, 4 will not be set if the TECU System Battery Voltage Low Fault is active. FMI 2 will not set if FMI 3, 4 is active. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 2 sets when the transmission controller detects the rail sensor voltage is above 4.5 volts or below 0.5 volts for 1 second of longer. FMI 3 sets when the transmission controller detects the rail sensor supply voltage is 5% above the expected supply voltage for 1 second or longer. FMI 4 set when the transmission controller detects the rail sensor supply voltage is 5% below the expected supply voltage for 1 second or longer. Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25. Possible Causes FMI 2 - Transmission Harness - Rail Position Sensor - TECU FMI 3,4 - TECU Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 51 is set the following conditions will occur: The red Service lamp will display and an F will flash in the gear display. 192 Gear Position Sensor Fault Fault Code 52 Isolation Procedures Fault is stored in TECU memory. If this fault occurs while moving, the transmission will remain in the current gear and the clutch will open when the vehicle comes to a stop. The operation mode will be changed to AutoShift Fallback Mode. Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit Digital Volt/Ohm Meter ServiceRanger 193 Fault Code 52 Isolation Procedures Connector Views Connector Views Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Key off. 3. What FMIs are present. If FMI 3 or 4 is listed. Replace the TECU. Go to STEP V If FMI 2 is listed. Go to STEP B Harness Front View (TECU - System Interface Connector) 37 38 35 36 1 6 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 7 B A C Gear Position Sensor Pins TECU 12 10 11 Rail Position Sensor Hall Effect B C A C A B Gear Position Plus Gear Position Signal Gear Position Minus NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations 194 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 52 Isolation Procedures STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Disconnect negative battery cable. 3. Disconnect the Transmission Harness 38-way connector. 4. Measure resistance between the Transmission Harness 38-way connector pins: 18 and 19 18 and 20 Note: An Auto Ranging Digital Volt/Ohm Meter must be used. If pin 18 and 19 resistance is 100 to 200 ohms and if pin 18 and 20 resistance is 5K to 7K ohms. Go to STEP C If any of the above conditions are not met. Go to STEP D STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Measure resistance between Transmission Harness 38-way connector pin 18 to ground. If resistance is 10K ohms or greater. Replace TECU (Only if Fault Code is Active). Go to STEP V If resistance is less than 10K ohms. Go to STEP D 195 Fault Code 52 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP D Procedure Condition Action 1. Disconnect Transmission Harness from Rail Select Sensor. 2. Measure resistance between Rail Select Sensor pins: A and C A and B Note: An Auto Ranging Digital Volt/Ohm Meter must be used. If pin A and C resistance is 5K to 7K and if pin A and B resistance is 100 to 200 ohms. Replace the transmission harness. Go to STEP V If any to the above conditions are not met. Replace Electric Shifter. Go to STEP V STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 52 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 52 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 196 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 52 Isolation Procedures 197 Fault Code 56 Isolation Procedures Input Shaft Speed Sensor Fault SA 3 SPN 161 MID 130 PID 161 FMI 2, 3, 4, 5, 10 Overview The Input Shaft Speed Sensor is located on the 6-bolt PTO cover, which is standard on the right side of the transmission. The sensor is a magnetic pickup that produces an AC voltage as the countershaft gear teeth moves past the end of the sensor. At idle the speed sensor output is low and increases as the speed of the countershaft increases. Conditions to Run Fault The Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. FMI 10 requires the transmission to be in neutral and the vehicle speed must be within range. FMI 2 will not set if there is already an active FMI 5 for the Input or Output Shaft Speed Sensors. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 2 is set when the TECU input shaft speed is compared to the output shaft speed and it produces an inconsistent reading for 1 second or greater. FMI 3 and 4 are set when the TECU detects a short to ground, short to battery, and the input shaft speed is 0 for 1 second or greater. FMI 5 is set when the TECU detects an open circuit and the Input Shaft Speed Sensor is 0 for 1 second or greater. FMI 10 is set when the TECU detects a 200 RPM or greater speed difference between the input shaft speed and the raw input shaft speed for 10 ms or greater. Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25 Possible Causes FMI 2,10 - Input Shaft Speed Sensor - TECU - Transmission Harness - Damaged Transmission Gearing - Contamination on the input shaft speed sensor FMI 3, 4, 5 - Input Shaft Speed Sensor - TECU 198 Connector Views Fault Code 56 Isolation Procedures - Transmission Harness Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 56 is set the following conditions will occur: The red Service lamp will display and an F will flash in the gear display. Fault is stored in TECU memory. The operation mode will be changed to AutoShift Fallback Mode. If this fault occurs while moving, the transmission will remain in the current gear and the clutch will open when the vehicle comes to a stop. If this fault occurs at power-up, the vehicle will crank but the transmission will not engage a gear. Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit Digital Volt/Ohm Meter ServiceRanger Connector Views Harness Front View (TECU - System Interface Connector) 37 38 35 36 1 6 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 7 TECU Input Shaft Speed Sensor 7 8 B A A B Input Shaft Speed Sensor (Connect View) Input Shaft Speed Sensor High Input Shaft Speed Sensor Low NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations 199 Fault Code 56 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Key off. 3. Disconnect negative battery cable. 4. Disconnect the Transmission Harness 38-way connector. 5. Measure the resistance between the transmission harness 38-way connector pins 7 and 8 and pin 7 and ground. If resistance is 2K to 4.5K ohms and pin 7 to ground is 10K ohms or greater Go to STEP B If resistance is outside of the range Go to STEP D STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Key on. 2. Measure the voltage from between the transmission harness 38-way connector pin 7 and ground If voltage is 0 volts Go to STEP C If voltage is 23-25 volts Repair the short to battery in the OEM harness. Go to STEP V STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Inspect Input Shaft Speed Sensor for contamination or damage. If no problem found Replace Transmission ECU (Only if Fault Code is Active). Go to STEP V If problem if found or you were sent here from Step D or E Replace Input Shaft Speed Sensor and inspect the countershaft gear for damage. Go to STEP V 200 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 56 Isolation Procedures STEP D Procedure Condition Action 1. Disconnect the Transmission Harness from Input Shaft Speed Sensor. 2. Measure resistance between Input Shaft Speed Sensor pins A and B. If resistance is 2K to 4.5K ohms Go to STEP E If resistance is outside of range Go to STEP C STEP E Procedure Condition Action 1. Measure resistance between Input Shaft Speed Sensor pin A and ground. If resistance is 10K ohms or greater Replace Transmission Harness. Go to STEP V If resistance is less than 10K ohms Go to STEP C STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Verify proper installation of speed sensor. 4. Key on. 5. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 6. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 7. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 56 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 56 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 201 Fault Code 58 Isolation Procedures Output Shaft Speed Sensor Fault SA 3 SPN 191 MID 130 PID 191 FMI 2, 3, 4, 5 Overview The Output Shaft Speed Sensor is located on the rear bearing cover at the 12 oclock position. The sensor is a magnetic pickup that produces an AC voltage as the tone wheel teeth moves past the end of the sensor. At idle the speed sensor output is low and it increases as the speed of the output shaft increases. Conditions to Run Fault The Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. FMI 2 will not set if there is already an active FMI 5 for the Input or Output Shaft Speed Sensors. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 2 is set when the TECU output shaft speed is compared to the input shaft speed and it produces an inconsistent reading for 1 second or greater. FMI 3,4 are set when the TECU detects a short to ground, short to battery, or the output shaft speed is 0 for 1 second or greater. FMI 5 is set when the TECU detects an open and the Output Shaft Speed Sensor is 0 for 1 second or greater. Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25. Possible Causes FMI 2 - Output Shaft Speed Sensor - TECU - Transmission Harness - Damaged Transmission Gearing - Contamination on the output shaft speed sensor FMI 3, 4, 5 - Output Shaft Speed Sensor - TECU - Transmission Harness 202 Connector Views Fault Code 58 Isolation Procedures Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 58 is set the following conditions will occur: The red Service lamp will display and an F will flash in the gear display. Fault is stored in TECU memory. The operation mode will be changed to AutoShift Fallback mode. If this fault occurs while moving, the transmission will remain in the current gear and the clutch will open when the vehicle comes to a stop. Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit Digital Volt/Ohm Meter ServiceRanger Connector Views Harness Front View (TECU - System Interface Connector) 37 38 35 36 1 6 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 7 TECU Output Shaft Speed Sensor 23 24 B A A B Output Shaft Speed Sensor (Connect View) Output Shaft Speed Sensor High Output Shaft Speed Sensor Low NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations 203 Fault Code 58 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Key off. 3. Disconnect negative battery cable. 4. Disconnect the Transmission Harness 38-way connector. 5. Measure resistance between the Transmission Harness 38-way connector pins 23 and 24 and 23 and ground. If resistance is 2K to 4.5K ohms and pin 23 to ground is 10K ohms or greater Go to STEP B If resistance is outside of the range Go to STEP D STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Key on. 2. Measure voltage between the Transmission Harness 38-way connector pin 23 and ground If voltage is 0 volts Go to STEP C If voltage is 23-25 volts Repair the short to battery in the OEM harness. Go to STEP V STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Inspect Output Shaft Speed Sensor for contamination or damage. If no problem found If problem is found or you were sent here from Step D or E Replace Transmission ECU (Only if Fault Code is Active). Go to STEP V Replace OUtput Shaft Speed Sensor and inspect the tone wheel for damage, looseness or corrosion. Go to STEP V 204 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 58 Isolation Procedures STEP D Procedure Condition Action 1. Disconnect the Transmission Harness from the Output Shaft Speed Sensor. 2. Measure resistance between Output Shaft Speed Sensor pins A and B. If resistance is 2K to 4.5K ohms Go to STEP E If resistance is outside of range Go to STEP C STEP E Procedure Condition Action 1. Measure resistance between Output Shaft Speed Sensor pin A and ground. If resistance is 10K ohms or greater Replace Transmission Harness. Go to STEP V If resistance is less than 10K ohms Go to STEP C STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Verify proper installation of speed sensor. 4. Key on. 5. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 6. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 7. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 58 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 58 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 205 Fault Code 59 Isolation Procedures J1939 Communication Link Fault (HCM) SA 239 SPN 639 FMI 2, 9 Overview J1939 is a high-speed twisted pair 250K data link with one 120 ohm resistor at each end of the link. The Hybrid Control Module (HCM) is connected to the J1939 data link at the 38-way connector. This link is used to transmit or receive operation information from other modules on the network like the Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) or Engine Control Module (ECM). Conditions to Run Fault The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 2 is set in PDM mode and the HCM loses communication with other modules on the J1938 data link for 3 consecutive messages. FMI 9 is set when the HCM looses communication with all modules on the J1939 data link for 30 consecutive messages or greater. Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25. Possible Causes FMI 2, 9 - J1939 data link - HCM Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 59 is set the following conditions will occur: The amber Check Hybrid and red Stop Hybrid lamps will not display, since the lamps are driven over the J1939 data link. Fault is stored in HCM memory. The operation mode will be changed to AutoShift Only mode. If the fault sets at power-up the engine will not crank. If the fault sets while driving, the vehicle will shift, however, when the vehicle comes to a stop the clutch will open and remain open. Electric motor/generator assist and regen are disabled; however, the high-voltage relays will remain powered. You may see a red Service lamp, and a F will flash in the gear display due to the active fault code 24,35, or 36. 206 Connector Views Fault Code 59 Isolation Procedures Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit Digital Volt/Ohm Meter ServiceRanger Connector Views HCM D Front Harness View (HCM - Vehicle Interface Connector) 37 38 35 36 1 6 7 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 9 Pin Diagnostic Connector 3 J1939 High C 2 J1939 Low J1939 High J1939 Low 9 Pin Diagnostic Connector NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations 207 Fault Code 59 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Key on. 3. Select the Vehicle Components screen and view the various modules that are reporting on the J1939 link If the HCM is not reporting on J1939 but the TECU is listed Go to STEP B If the HCM and TECU are not reporting on J1939 Go to STEP C STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Disconnect negative battery cable. 3. Disconnect HCM Vehicle Harness 38-way connector. 4. Measure resistance between HCM Vehicle Harness 38-way connector pin 2 and 3. Note: Make sure the volt/ohm meter is on the proper scale (around 200 ohm scale). If resistance between pin 2 and 3 is between 50-70 ohms Replace HCM. Go to STEP V If resistance is outside of range Repair J1939 Data link Harness. Go to STEP V 208 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 59 Isolation Procedures STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Measure the resistance between pins C and D on the 9-way diagnostic connector If resistance between pin C and D is 50-70 ohms Go to STEP D If resistance is 70 ohms or greater One or more of the terminating resistors on the J1939 data link harness is missing, out of range, or there is an open in the link. Repair the OEM J1939 data link harness. Go to STEP V If resistance is 50 ohms or less There is an additional terminating resistor present. Repair the OEM J1939 data link harness. Go to STEP V STEP D Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Measure resistance between pins C and ground on the 9-way diagnostic connector If resistance between pin C and ground is 10K ohms or greater Attempt to communicate with another vehicle and ensure ServiceRanger is working. If ServiceRanger fails to communicate with another vehicle, call 1-800-826-HELP (4357). If resistance is outside of range Repair J1939 Data link Harness for a short to ground. Go to STEP V 209 Fault Code 59 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 59 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 59 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 210 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 59 Isolation Procedures 211 Fault Code 60 Isolation Procedures CAN Communication Link Fault (HCM) SA 239 SPN 625 FMI 2, 9 Overview The Controller Area Network (CAN) is a high-speed twisted pair 500K proprietary data link that connects the HCM to the Electric Clutch Actuator (ECA), Battery Control Module and Inverter. The link contains one 120 ohm resistor at each end. The link is used to transmit information specific to clutch position or power electronics operations. Conditions to Run Fault The HCM is powered and ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 9 is set when the HCM loses communication with all modules on the CAN data link for 30 consecutive messages or greater. FMI 2 is set in PDM mode when the HCM loses communication on the Hybrid CAN for 3 consecutive messages. Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25. Possible Causes FMI 2, 9 - CAN data link - HCM Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 60 is set the following conditions will occur: The red Stop Hybrid lamp will display. Fault is stored in HCM memory. The operation mode will be changed to AutoShift Only mode. If the fault sets at power-up the engine will not crank. Electric Motor/Generator assist and regeneration are disabled, however, the high-voltage relays will remain powered. If the fault sets while driving the clutch will either close or open and remain in this position permanently. Transmission defaults start gear to 1st. 212 Connector Views Fault Code 60 Isolation Procedures Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit Digital Volt/Ohm Meter ServiceRanger Connector Views HCM H Harness Front View (HCM - Vehicle Interface Connector) 37 38 35 36 1 6 7 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 9 Pin Diagnostic Connector 28 CAN High J 27 CAN Low CAN Low CAN High 9 Pin Diagnostic Connector (Terminating Resistor in HCM) NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations 213 Fault Code 60 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Key off. 3. Measure the resistance between one of the following: Diagnostic the 9-pin connector pins H and J. Pins A and B on the 3-way connector. Pins 1 and 2 on the 2-way connector. If resistance between pin H and J, A and B, or 1 and 2 is between 50 to 70 ohms Go to STEP B Note: The 3-way and 2-way data link connectors are located next to the 9-pin diagnostic connector If resistance is more than 70 ohms One or more of the terminating resistors on the CAN data link harness is either missing or out of range, or there is an open in the link. Repair OEM CAN data link Harness. Go to STEP V Note: Make sure the volt/ohm meter is on the proper scale (around 200 ohm scale). If resistance is less than 50 ohms There is an additional terminating resistor present. Repair the OEM CAN data link Harness. Go to STEP V STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Disconnect negative battery cable. 3. Disconnect HCM Vehicle Harness 38-way connector. 4. Measure resistance between HCM Vehicle Harness 38-way connector pin 27 and 28. If resistance between pin 27 and 28 is between 110-130 ohms Replace HCM. Go to STEP V Note: Make sure the volt/ohm meter is on the proper scale (around 200 ohm scale) If resistance is outside of range Repair the CAN data link Harness. Go to STEP V 214 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 60 Isolation Procedures STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 60 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 60 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 215 Fault Code 61 Isolation Procedures Rail Select Motor Fault SA 3 SPN 772 MID 130 SID 39 FMI 5, 6 Overview The Electric Shifter contains two electric motors called the Rail and Gear motors. These motors move a shift finger between the various rails which engage the shift rails. Power is supplied from the Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU). Conditions to Run Fault The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. The TECU System Battery Voltage Low Fault is not active The TECU System Battery Voltage Weak Fault is not active The Electric Shifter is not energized and the shift finger is not moving Conditions to Set Fault FMI 5 and 6 are set when the TECU detects 5 continuous open or short conditions on the Electric Shifter while the motor drive circuit is idle in a 500 ms interval. Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25. Possible Causes FMI 5, 6 - Electric Shifter - TECU - Transmission Harness Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 61 is set the following conditions will occur: The red 'Service lamp will display and an F will flash in the gear display. Fault is stored in TECU memory. The operation mode will be changed to AutoShift Fallback mode. If this fault occurs while moving, the transmission will remain in the current gear and the clutch will open when the vehicle comes to a stop. 216 Connector Views Fault Code 61 Isolation Procedures Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit Digital Volt/Ohm Meter ServiceRanger Connector Views Harness Front View (TECU - System Interface Connector) 37 38 35 36 1 6 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 7 TECU 35 37 Rail Select Motor Rail Motor Minus Rail Motor Plus Harness Front View (Rail Select Motor) NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations B A 217 Fault Code 61 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Key Off. 3. Disconnect negative battery cable. 4. Disconnect the Transmission Harness 38-way connector from the Transmission ECU. 5. Measure resistance between the Transmission Harness 38-way connector pins 35 and 37 If resistance is 0.3 to 150 ohms Go to STEP B If resistance is outside of range Go to STEP C STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Measure resistance between the Transmission Harness 38-way connector pins 35 and ground. If resistance is 10K ohms or greater Replace Transmission ECU (Only if Fault Code is Active). Go to STEP V If resistance is less than 10K ohms Go to STEP C STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Disconnect 2-way Rail Select motor connector from the Transmission Harness. 2. Measure resistance between Rail Select Motor harness 2-way connector pins A and B and A to ground. If resistance between A & B is 0.3 to 150 ohms and pin A to ground is 10K ohms or greater Replace Transmission Harness. Go to STEP V If resistance is outside of range Replace Electric Shifter. Go to STEP V 218 Fault Code 61 Isolation Procedures STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 61 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 61 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 219 Fault Code 63 Isolation Procedures Gear Select Motor Fault SA 3 SPN 773 MID 130 SID 40 FMI 5, 6 Overview The Electric Shifter contains two electric motors called the Rail and Gear motors. These motors move a shift finger between the various rails which engage the shift rails. Power is supplied from the Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU). Conditions to Run Fault The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. The TECU System Battery Voltage Low Fault is not active The TECU System Battery Voltage Weak Fault is not active The Electric Shifter is not energized and the shift finger is not moving Conditions to Set Fault FMI 5 and 6 are set when the TECU detects 5 continuous open or short conditions on the Electric Shifter while the motor drive circuit is idle in a 500ms interval. Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25. Possible Causes FMI 5, 6 - Electric Shifter - TECU - Transmission Harness Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 63 is set the following conditions will occur: The red Service lamp will display and an F will flash in the gear display. Fault is stored in TECU memory. The operation mode will be changed to AutoShift Fallback mode. If this fault occurs while moving, the transmission will remain in the current gear position and the clutch will open when the vehicle comes to a stop. 220 Connector Views Fault Code 63 Isolation Procedures Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit Digital Volt/Ohm Meter ServiceRanger Connector Views Harness Front View (TECU - System Interface Connector) 37 38 35 36 1 6 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 7 TECU 36 38 Gear Select Motor Gear Motor Minus Gear Motor Plus Harness Front View (Gear Select Motor) NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations B A 221 Fault Code 63 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Key Off. 3. Disconnect negative battery cable. 4. Disconnect the Transmission Harness 38-way connector from the Transmission ECU. If resistance is 0.3 to 150 ohms Go to STEP B If resistance is outside of range Go to STEP C STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Measure resistance between the Transmission Harness 38-way connector pin 36 and ground. If resistance is 10K ohms or greater Replace Transmission ECU (Only if Fault Code is Active). Go to STEP V If resistance is less than 10K ohms Go to STEP C STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Disconnect 2-way Gear Select Motor connector from the Transmission Harness. 2. Measure resistance between Gear Select Motor harness 2-way connector pins A and B and A to ground. If resistance between A and B is 0.3 to 150 ohms and pin A to ground is 10K ohms or greater Replace Transmission Harness. Go to STEP V If resistance is outside of range Replace Electric Shifter. Go to STEP V 222 Fault Code 63 Isolation Procedures STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 63 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 63 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 223 Fault Code 64 Isolation Procedures ECA Fault SA 239 SPN 788, 520198, 520199, 524035 FMI 0, 12, 13, 21 - 28 Overview The Electric Clutch Actuator (ECA) controls the position of the clutch assembly. The ECA has a main power 3-way connector that is directly connected to the 24-volt battery and an 8-way connector that is connected to inputs like the HCM and the Engine Speed Sensor. The ECA communicates with the Hybrid Control Module (HCM) over the proprietary Controller Area Network (CAN) data link to change position, show faults, or include other operation information. Conditions to Run Fault The ECA ignition voltage is greater than 8.5 volts. The ECA Battery Voltage is greater than 7.8 when ignition voltage is greater than 8.5 volts. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 12 is set for various internal ECA failures. FMI 22-28 can be set for excessive motor current or incorrect shaft position. FMI 0 is set when the ECA inverter temperature exceeds 130C. FMI 13 is set when the ECA can not find the clutch release bearing touch point after three attempts. Possible Causes FMI 12 - ECA FMI 21-28 - Excessive debris buildup on/around the ECA. - Binding cross-shafts. FMI 0 - MIssing exhaust shield or exhaust to close to ECA Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 64 is set the following conditions will occur: The red Stop Hybrid lamp will display for FMI 12, 21, 22, 23, 24, 26, 27, or 28. The amber Check Hybrid lamp will display for FMI 0, 13, or 25. Fault is stored in HCM memory. If the fault occurs while driving, the ECA will either maintain current clutch position or move to the last position commanded by the HCM. If the fault occurs at power-up, the vehicle will not crank. 224 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 64 Isolation Procedures Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit Digital Volt/Ohm Meter Service Ranger Note: No Schematic for this Code. Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature. Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. What FMIs are present If FMI 0is listed Check for damaged or missing exhaust shielding by the ECA. Replace or reroute exhaust to reduce internal ECA temperatures. Go to STEP V If FMI 12 is listed Replace the ECA. Go to STEP V If FMI 21-28 are listed Go to STEP B 225 Fault Code 64 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Disconnect the 24 volt battery cables 2. Remove the ECA from the clutch housing. 3. Check the ECA and clutch housing for debris build-up 4. Rotate the clutch release shaft by hand to check for binding If no excessive debris is found and clutch release shaft rotates without binding. Replace ECA. Go to STEP V If excessive debris is found around ECA or inside the clutch housing or the clutch release shaft binds when rotated by hand. Remove debris build up around ECA area. Replace / repair clutch release shaft and upper bushing as needed for proper shaft rotation. Go to STEP V STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 64 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 64 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 226 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 64 Isolation Procedures 227 Fault Code 65 Isolation Procedures ECA Speed Sensor Fault SA 239 SPN 520203 FMI 2, 5 Overview The Electric Clutch Actuator (ECA) controls the position of the clutch assembly. The ECA has a main power 3-way connector that is directly connected to the 24-volt battery and an 8-way connector that is connected to inputs like the Hybrid Control Module (HCM) and the Engine Speed Sensor. The ECA communicates with the HCM over the proprietary Controller Area Network (CAN) data link to change position, show faults, or include other operation information. Conditions to Run Fault The ECA ignition voltage is greater than 8.5 volts. Fault Code 18 or 87 are active Conditions to Set Fault FMI 2 is set when the HCM detects engine speed at idle, but does not detect ECA engine speed. FMI 5 is set when the ECA detects an open on the ECA speed sensor signal circuit at key on. Possible Causes FMI 2, 5 - ECA Speed Sensor - ECA Speed Sensor harness - ECA Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 65 is set the following conditions will occur: The amber Check Hybrid lamp will display. Fault is stored in HCM memory. Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit Digital Volt/Ohm Meter 228 ECA Speed Sensor Fault Fault Code 65 Isolation Procedures ServiceRanger 229 Fault Code 65 Isolation Procedures Connector Views Connector Views Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. What FMIs are listed? If FMI 5 is listed Go to STEP B If FMI 2 is listed Go to STEP C ECA 2G 2F Speed Sensor Eng Speed Sensor (-) Eng Speed Sensor (+) B A A B C ECA 8-Way Connector E A B C D H G F ECA 3-Way Connector A B ECA Speed Sensor (Connect View) NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations 230 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 65 Isolation Procedures STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Check resistance between ECA 8-way connector pins F and G If resistance between ECA 8-way connector pins F and G is 140 - 180 ohms Go to STEP C If resistance is out of range Repair the open in the sensor or the harness from the ECA to the sensor. Go to STEP V STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Check resistance between ECA 8-way connector pins F and ground If resistance is 10K or greater Go to STEP D If resistance is out of range Repair the short to ground in the sensor or the harness from the ECA to the sensor. Go to STEP V STEP D Procedure Condition Action 1. Key on. 2. Measure voltage from the ECA 8-way connector pin G and ground If voltage is 0 volts at key on and FMI 5 is active Replace the ECA (only if Fault Code is active). Go to STEP V If voltage is 0 volts at key on and FMI 2 is active Go to STEP E If voltage is greater than 0 volts at key on Repair the short to power on the ECA speed sensor harness. Go to STEP V 231 Fault Code 65 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP E Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Remove the ECA speed sensor and examine the sensor end for signs of damage or debris buildup If the sensor shows no cracks or signs of metallic debris buildup on the end Go to STEP F If the sensor is damaged or has debris buildup Replace or clean the ECA sensor. Go to STEP V STEP F Procedure Condition Action 1. Inspect the engine flywheel to ensure there are no missing or damaged teeth If flywheel teeth are all intact and in good condition Reinstall flywheel sensor until it touches the flywheel then rotate counterclockwise 1/2 to 1 full turn. Tighten jam nut and drive vehicle. If fault returns replace the sensor. Go to STEP V If flywheel teeth are damaged or missing Concern is with the flywheel. Contact your OEM for repair procedures. STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 65 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 65 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 232 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 65 Isolation Procedures 233 Fault Code 66 Isolation Procedures ECA Battery Voltage Fault SA 239 SPN 520271 FMI 3, 4, 14 Overview The Electric Clutch Actuator (ECA) controls the position of the clutch assembly. The ECA has a main power 3-way connector that is directly connected to the 24-volt battery positive and negative terminals. Conditions to Run Fault The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. The ECA ignition voltage is greater than 8.5 volts. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 3 is set when the ECA battery voltage is above 17 volts for 10 ms or greater. FMI 4 is set when the ECA battery voltage is below 8.5 volts for 10 ms or greater. FMI 14 is set when the ECA battery voltage is below 8.5 volts for 10 ms or greater, but the HCM reports the battery voltage is within range. Possible Causes FMI 3 - Charging system - ECA FMI 4 - ECA power supply harness, connections, and fuse holder - Low batteries or bad main power connection - Charging system - ECA FMI 14 - ECA power supply harness, connections, and fuse holder Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 66 is set the following conditions will occur: The red Stop Hybrid lamp will display Fault is stored in HCM memory If the fault occurs while driving, the ECA will either maintain current clutch position or move to the last position commanded by the HCM, then the ECA holding device will engage If the fault occurs at power-up, the vehicle will not crank 234 Connector Views Fault Code 66 Isolation Procedures Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit Digital Volt/Ohm Meter ServiceRanger Connector Views ECA 1C Battery 1B P l u s
( + ) Ground ECA Ground ECA Power A B C ECA 3-Way Connector NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations 235 Fault Code 66 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Perform Electrical Pretest. If FMI 3 or 4 is active after performing the Electrical Pretest
Replace the ECA. Go to STEP V If FMI 14 is active after performing the Electrical Pretest Replace the ECA power harness. Go to STEP V STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 66 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 66 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 236 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 66 Isolation Procedures 237 Fault Code 67 Isolation Procedures ECA Ignition Voltage Fault SA 239 SPN 520274 FMI 3, 4, 5 Overview The Electric Clutch Actuator (ECA) controls the position of the clutch assembly. The ECA has a 8- way connector that supplies ignition power to the ECA from the Hybrid Control Module (HCM). Conditions to Run Fault The Hybrid Control Module (HCM) ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 3 is set when the ECA ignition voltage is shorted to the 24-volt system which is detected through the HCM prior to powering the ignition supply for the ECA. FMI 4 is set when the ECA ignition voltage is shorted to ground during key on operation which is detected by the HCM. FMI 5 is set when the ECA ignition voltage is open circuit after the key is on. Possible Causes FMI 3, 4, 5 - ECA ignition supply harness from HCM - HCM - ECA Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 67 is set the following conditions will occur: The red Stop Hybrid lamp will display Fault is stored in HCM memory If the fault occurs while driving, the ECA will either maintain current clutch position or move to the last position commanded by the HCM, then the ECA holding device will engage If the fault occurs at power-up, the vehicle will not crank Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. 238 Connector Views Fault Code 67 Isolation Procedures Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit Digital Volt/Ohm Meter ServiceRanger Connector Views HCM ECA ECA Ignition (System) 13 2H 1C Battery 1A 1B P l u s
( + ) Ground ECA Ignition ECA Ground ECA Power ECA 8-Way Connector E A B C D H G F Front Harness View (HCM - Hybrid System Interface Connector) 37 38 35 36 1 6 7 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations 239 Fault Code 67 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Key off. 3. What FMIs are present If FMI 3 is listed Go to STEP B If FMI 4 is listed Go to STEP C If FMI 5 is listed Go to STEP E STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Disconnect the ECA 8-way connector. 3. Measure voltage on the ECA 8-way connector from pin H to ground. If voltage is less than 0 volts Replace the HCM. Go to STEP V If voltage is 23-25 volts Repair the short to battery in the OEM harness. Go to STEP V STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Disconnect the ECA 8-way connector. 3. Key on. 4. Measure voltage from the ECA 8-way connector from pin H to ground. If voltage from H to ground is 23-25 volts Replace the HCM. Go to STEP V If voltage is outside of range Go to STEP D 240 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 67 Isolation Procedures STEP D Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Disconnect the HCM 38-way System Harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between the HCM System Harness 38-way connector pin 13 and ground If resistance from pin 13 to ground is 10K ohms or greater Replace the HCM. Go to STEP V If resistance is outside of range Repair the OEM harness from the ECA to the HCM. Go to STEP V STEP E Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Disconnect the HCM 38-way System Harness connector. 3. Measure the resistance between the HCM System Harness 38-way connector and the ECA 8-way connector on the following pins: HVM pin 13 to ECA pin H If the resistance between pins 13 and H is 0-0.3 ohms Replace the ECA (only if Fault Code is Active). Go to STEP V If resistance is outside of range Repair the open in the harness between the ECA and HCM. Go to STEP V 241 Fault Code 67 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 67 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 67 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 242 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 67 Isolation Procedures 243 Fault Code 68 Isolation Procedures Grade Sensor Fault SA 239 SPN 520321 FMI 12, 13, 14 Overview The grade sensor, an internal component of the HCM, calculates needed vehicle grade position for Hill Start Assist (HSA) feature to function properly. HSA will momentarily hold the service brakes at launch to allow single foot pedal operation without vehicle roll-back on grades. Conditions to Run Fault The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 12 is set when the grade sensor is not active or present and Hill Start Assist is enabled in the HCM configuration. FMI 13 is set when Hill Start Assist is enabled in the HCM configuration but the grade sensor has not been calibrated. FMI 14 is set when the HCM is equipped with a grade sensor, HSA is enabled and the signal from the sensor is out of range. Possible Causes FMI 12 - Incorrect HCM configuration - HCM FMI 13 - Grade sensor calibration - Incorrect HCM configuration FMI 14 - HCM - Incorrect HCM mounting to transmission Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 68 is set the following conditions will occur: The amber Check Hybrid lamp will display only if the vehicle is moving. Fault is stored in HCM memory. Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. 244 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 68 Isolation Procedures Required Tools Basic Hand Tools ServiceRanger Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Key on. 2. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. If FMI 12 is active Go to STEP B If FMI 13 is active Go to STEP C If FMI 14 is active Go to STEP D STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Key on. 2. Using ServiceRanger view the Hybrid HCM configuration HSA configuration is set at HSA Enabled and Hill Start Assist feature is not needed Select No HSA from the drop down box on the right side of the screen, then save this configuration change by selecting download. Go to STEP V HSA configuration is set at HSA Enabled and Hill Start Assist feature is needed The HCM must be changed to hardware version 3.7 or higher containing an internal grade sensor. Contact Eaton for correct HCM part number information. 245 Fault Code 68 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Key on. 2. Using ServiceRanger calibrate the grade sensor by selecting the Advanced Product functions from the main menu 3. Select Hybrid Control Module from the upper left menu 4. Select Grade Sensor Calibration and follow the on screen instructions If FMI 13 is not active after calibrating Calibration complete. Go to STEP V If FMI 13 is active after calibrating Contact Eaton at 1-800-826- HELP (4357). STEP D Procedure Condition Action 1. Key on. 2. Ensure the HCM is properly mounted to the transmission If HCM is not properly mounted or cap screws are loose Tighten HCM mounting cap screws. Go to STEP V If HCM is properly mounted to the transmission Replace HCM. Go to STEP V 246 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 68 Isolation Procedures STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 8 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 8 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 247 Fault Code 70 Isolation Procedures Engine Failed to Respond Fault (HCM) SA 239 SPN 188, 518, 539, 544 FMI 0, 1, 2, 7 Overview The HCM communicates with the Engine ECM over the J1939 data link during normal operation to control the engine torque and speed for transmission shifting. Conditions to Run Fault The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. J1939 Communication Link Fault (HCM) not active. J1939 Engine Message Fault (HCM) not active. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 7 is set when the HCM commanded engine torque is less than 80% Max Engine Torque, HCM commanded engine torque is greater than 100 ft. lbs., and the difference between commanded engine torque and engine torque feedback is greater than 80 lb-ft for more than 1 second. Or, if the engine speed or torque maps are received with an error. Possible Causes FMI 7 - Engine - Fuel System - Exhaust Back Pressure - Turbo charger - Air Intake/Filter Restriction - Un-reported engine loads - Incorrect engine configuration settings for transmission assembly Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 70 is set the following conditions will occur: The amber Check Hybrid lamp will display. Fault is stored in HCM memory. If the fault is set while driving, the vehicle may experience shifting concerns. Conditions to Clear Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. 248 Isolation Procedures Fault Code 70 Isolation Procedures Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit Digital Volt/Ohm Meter ServiceRanger Note: No Schematic for this Code. Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature. Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Key on. 3. Retrieve codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If code 70 is active Contact the OEM because the engine is failing to respond to the HCMs command during a shift or the maps were received in error. If code 70 is not active Test complete. 249 Fault Code 71 Isolation Procedures Failed to Disengage a Gear SA 3 SPN 520275 MID 130 SID 60 FMI 7 Overview The Transmission Electronic Control Unit controls the Electric Shifter, which engages the different rails and gear positions. The Electric Shifter is comprised of two electric motors; one changes the rail position and the other changes the gear position. Conditions to Run Fault The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. The TECU System Battery Voltage Low Fault is not active. The TECU System Battery Voltage Weak Fault is not active. TECU J1939 Communication Link Fault is not active. J1939 engine torque is zero 5% and J1939 engine speed is within 50 RPM of synchronous. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 7 is set when the Electric Shifter fails three consecutive attempts to disengage a gear. Possible Causes FMI 7 - Dragging Clutch - ECA - Shift Bar Housing - Electric Shifter - Gear Select Sensor - Yoke, Sliding Clutch, Mainshaft - TECU - Torque locked in gear Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 71 is set the following conditions will occur: Fault is stored in TECU memory If the fault sets while driving, the vehicle will maintain the current gear and the clutch will open when the vehicle comes to a stop. 250 Failed to Disengage a Gear Fault Code 71 Isolation Procedures Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit Digital Volt/Ohm Meter ServiceRanger Note: No Schematic for this Code. Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature. Note: The picture above shows the shift forks in the neutral position. 251 Fault Code 71 Isolation Procedures Isolation Procedures Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Key on. 3. Depress N on the Push Button Shift Control. 4. Observe Gear Display. If Gear Display shows: N Go to STEP V If Gear Display shows: 71 Go to STEP B STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Perform the Electrical Pretest. If no issues found during the Electrical Pretest Go to STEP C If issue was repaired during the Electrical Pretest Repeat STEP A STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Remove Electric Shifter from Shift Bar Housing to see what gear position is currently engaged. 3. Attempt to move the engaged rail back to neutral If rails move from the engaged position to neutral Go to STEP D If rails do not move from the engaged position Attempt to take the torque off the driveline. If concern is still present, inspect the main case for a damaged mainshaft, sliding clutch, or fork. Go to STEP V. 252 Isolation Procedures Fault Code 71 Isolation Procedures STEP D Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Inspect the following: Shift blocks are fastened to shift rails securely Electric shifter is free from any excessive lube contamination buildup Two gears positions can not be engaged at the same time If no problem found Replace the electric shifter. Go to STEP V If problem is found Repair as required. Go to STEP V STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 72 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 72 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 253 Fault Code 72 Isolation Procedures Failed to Select Rail Fault SA 3 SPN 520277 MID 130 SID 59 FMI 7 Overview The Transmission Electronic Control Unit controls the Electric Shifter, which engages the different rails and gear positions. The Electric Shifter is comprised of two electric motors; one changes the rail position and the other changes the gear position. Conditions to Run Fault The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. The TECU System Battery Voltage Low Fault is not active. The TECU System Battery Voltage Weak Fault is not active. This fault may occur at power-up after 15 seconds. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 7 is set when the Electric Shifter fails five consecutive attempts to engage a particular rail position. Possible Causes FMI 7 - Shift Bar Housing - Electric Shifter - Rail Select Sensor - TECU Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 72 is set the following conditions will occur: Fault is stored in TECU memory If the fault sets while driving, the vehicle will continue to select the proper rail position. Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. 254 Failed to Select Rail Fault Fault Code 72 Isolation Procedures Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit Digital Volt/Ohm Meter ServiceRanger Note: No Schematic for this Code. Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature. Note: The picture above shows the shift forks in the neutral position. 255 Fault Code 72 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Key on. 3. Place Shift Device in Neutral. 4. Depress Service Brake. 5. Observe gear display. If you have an active code 72 Go to STEP B If Gear Display shows solid gear Go to STEP V STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Perform the Electrical Pretest. If no issues found during the Electrical Pretest Go to STEP C If issue was repaired during the Electrical Pretest Repeat STEP A 256 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 72 Isolation Procedures STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Remove Electric Shifter from Shift Bar Housing. 3. Inspect the following: Shift blocks are fastened to shift rails securely Shift rails move into each gear position Electric shifter is free from any excessive lube contamination buildup Two gear positions can not be engaged at the same time If no problem found Replace the Electric Shifter. Go to STEP V If problem is found Repair as required. Go to STEP V STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 72 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 72 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 257 Fault Code 73 Isolation Procedures Failed to Engage a Gear Fault SA 3 SPN 520278 MID 130 SID 58 FMI 7 Overview The Transmission Electronic Control Unit controls the Electric Shifter, which engages the different rails and gear positions. The Electric Shifter is comprised of two electric motors; one changes the rail position and the other changes the gear position. Conditions to Run Fault The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. The TECU System Battery Voltage Low Fault is not active. The TECU System Battery Voltage Weak Fault is not active. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 7 is set when the Electric Shifter fails five consecutive attempts to engage a particular gear position. Possible Causes FMI 7 - Dragging Clutch - ECA - Shift Bar Housing - Electric Shifter - Gear Select Sensor - Yoke, Sliding Clutch, Mainshaft - TECU Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 73 is set the following conditions will occur: Fault is stored in TECU memory. If the fault sets while driving, the vehicle will maintain the current position. 258 Failed to Engage a Gear Fault Fault Code 73 Isolation Procedures Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit Digital Volt/Ohm Meter ServiceRanger Note: No Schematic for this Code. Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature. Note: The picture above shows the shift forks in the neutral position. 259 Fault Code 73 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Key on. 3. Place Shift Device in Neutral. 4. Depress Service Brake. 5. Select Drive. 6. Observe gear display. If you have an active code 73 Go to STEP B If Gear Display shows solid gear Go to STEP V STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Perform the Electrical Pretest. If no issues found during the Electrical Pretest Go to STEP C If issue was repaired during the Electrical Pretest Repeat STEP A 260 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 73 Isolation Procedures STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Remove Electric Shifter from Shift Bar Housing. 3. Inspect the following: Shift blocks are fastened to shift rails securely. Electric Shifter is free from an excessive lube contamination build-up. Two gear positions can not be engaged at the same time. If no problem is found Replace the Electric Shifter. Go to STEP V If problem is found Repair as required. Go to STEP V STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 73 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 73 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 261 Fault Code 74 Isolation Procedures Engine Failed to Respond Fault (TECU) SA 3 SPN 93, 190 MID 130 PID 93, 190 FMI 7 Overview The Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) communicates with the Engine ECM over the J1939 data link during normal operation, however, engine control is accomplished by the engine Engine Control Module (ECM) during Hybrid mode. The TECU changes the mode to AutoShift Only or AutoShift Fallback mode. Then the TECU is directly requesting changes in engine speed and torque instead of the Hybrid Control Module (HCM). Conditions to Run Fault The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. J1939 Communication Link Fault (TECU) not active. J1939 Engine Message Fault (TECU) not active. J1939 engine speed is greater than 300 RPM if the TECU is in speed control mode, or greater than 1000 RPM if the TECU is in torque control mode. Desired Engine Speed is less than J1939 engine configuration map speed. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 7 is set when the difference between actual engine percent torque and desired engine percent torque is greater than 50 for 2 continuous seconds, or when the difference between desired engine speed and actual engine speed is greater than 400 RPM for four continuous seconds. Possible Causes FMI 7 - Engine - Fuel System - Exhaust Back Pressure - Turbo charger - Air Intake/Filter Restriction - Un-reported engine loads - Incorrect engine configuration settings for transmission assembly Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 74 is set the following conditions will occur: 262 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 74 Isolation Procedures Fault is stored in TECU memory. If the fault sets while driving, the vehicle will remain in the current gear position. Once the vehicle is stopped, start and reverse gears can be engaged. TECU changes to Autoshift Fallback mode. Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit Digital Volt/Ohm Meter ServiceRanger Note: No schematic for this code. Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature. Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Key on. 3. Retrieve codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If code 74 is active Contact the OEM because the engine is failing to respond to the transmissions command during a shift. If code 74 is not active Test complete. 263 Fault Code 75 Isolation Procedures Power Down in Gear Fault SA 3 SPN 520276 MID 130 SID 60 FMI 14 Overview The Push Button Shift Control (PBSC) is connected to the Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) over the High Integrity Link (HIL) to communicate driver mode selection and fault status. At power-down the PBSC should be placed in N to perform the proper calibration sequence and to prevent a torque locked transmission. Conditions to Run Fault The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. The PBSC ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 14 is set when the TECU goes into the power-down sequence and a drive mode selection other than N is confirmed. Possible Causes FMI 14 - Driver powered down in Non-neutral mode Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 75 is set the following conditions will occur: Fault is stored in TECU memory only as an Inactive fault, since it only sets during the power- down sequence. Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit Digital Volt/Ohm Meter 264 Isolation Procedures Fault Code 75 Isolation Procedures ServiceRanger Note: No Schematic for this Code. Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature. Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Key on. 3. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If code 75 is inactive No action necessary, this code indicates the driver powered down the system prior to selecting neutral. Note: Explain to driver, N must be selected on the Push Button Shift Control before powering down to prevent a stuck in gear situation and/ or a power-up no crank situation. 265 Fault Code 76 Isolation Procedures High Voltage Battery Potential Voltage Fault SA 239 SPN 520250 FMI 3, 4, 16, 18 Overview The High-Voltage Batteries are 172 volts each connected in series to produce 340 volts DC. The Battery Control Unit located in the Relay Box communicates with each battery to determine temperature, SOC, and voltage. This information is then sent to the Inverter. Conditions to Run Fault The Inverter enable voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 16 volts. The Battery Control Unit ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 16 volts. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 3 is set when the BCU detects the high-voltage battery is greater than 417 volts for 240 ms. FMI 16 is set when the BCU detects the high-voltage battery is greater than 408 volts for 240 ms. FMI 4 is set when the BCU detects the high-voltage battery is less than 211 volts for 240 ms. FMI 18 is set when the BCU detects the high-voltage battery is less than 240 volts for 240 ms. Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25. Possible Causes FMI 3, 4 - PEC - DC cable - DC interlock loop - Inverter - Service switch - Inertia Switch Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 76 is set the following conditions will occur: The amber Check Hybrid lamp will blink for FMI 4 and display solid for FMI 3, 16, 18 Fault is stored in HCM memory Inverter shuts high-voltage system off HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode Transmission defaults start gear to 1st 266 Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 76 Isolation Procedures Conditions to Clear Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger Warnings and Cautions A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. DANGER HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE You will be severly injured or killed if you do not follow the procedure. Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. WARNING To reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE 267 Fault Code 76 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures Note: No Schematic for this Code. Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature. Fault Isolation Procedures Check to see if the red Service Switch on the front of the PEC is pulled out. If the switch is pushed in pull the switch out and turn the ignition key off. After 2 minutes turn the ignition key on. STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Key on 3. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 4. Key off 5. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage. 6. What FMIs are present If Fault Code 76 is listed with an active Fault Code 101 FMI 27, 28 Go to procedure for Fault Code 101 FMI 27 or 28 page 315 If Fault Code 76 is listed with an active Fault Code 101 FMI 29 Go to procedure for Fault Code 101 FMI 29 page 315 If Fault Code 76 FMI 3 or 4 are listed with no other active Hybrid Fault Codes Contact Eaton at 1-800-826- HELP (4357). If Fault Code 76 FMI 3 or 4 are listed with other active Hybrid Fault Codes Go to procedure for active Hybrid Fault Code(s). If Fault Code 76 FMI 16 or 18 are listed Test complete. FMIs 16 and 18 require no action or replacement. IMPORTANT WARNING 268 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 76 Isolation Procedures STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 73 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 73 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 269 Fault Code 78 Isolation Procedures High Voltage Battery Current Fault SA 239 SPN 520232 FMI 6 Overview The High-Voltage Batteries are 172 volts each connected in series to produce 340 volts DC. The Battery Control Unit (BCU) located in the Relay Box communicates with each battery to determine temperature, SOC, and voltage. This information is then sent to the Inverter. Conditions to Run Fault The Inverter enable voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 16 volts. The Battery Control Unit ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 16 volts. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 6 is set when the BCU detects high-voltage battery current is greater than 200 amps for 1 second. Possible Causes FMI 6 - PEC Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 78 is set the following conditions will occur: The amber Check Hybrid lamp will display Fault is stored in Hybrid Control Module (HCM) memory Inverter shuts high-voltage system off HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode Transmission defaults start gear to 1st Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger 270 Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 78 Isolation Procedures Warnings and Cautions A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Note: No Schematic for this Code. Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature. DANGER HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE You will be severly injured or killed if you do not follow the procedure. Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. WARNING To reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE 271 Fault Code 78 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9- pin diagnostic connector. 2. Key off. 3. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage. 4. What Faults are present If Fault Code 78 is listed with an active Fault Code 113 Go to procedure for Fault Code 113, FMI 6 on page 369 If Fault Code 78 is listed with no Fault Code 113 Replace the PEC. Go to STEP V STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 78 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 78 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 WARNING 272 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 78 Isolation Procedures 273 Fault Code 82 Isolation Procedures High Voltage Battery Temperature Fault SA 239 SPN 520233 FMI 0, 16 Overview The High-Voltage Batteries are 172 volts each connected in series to produce 340 volts DC. The Battery Control Unit located in the Relay Box communicates with each battery to determine temperature, SOC, and voltage. This information is then sent to the Inverter. Conditions to Run Fault The Inverter enable voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 16 volts. The Battery Control Unit ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 0 is set when the BCU detects high-voltage battery temperature is greater than 70C for 6.4 seconds. FMI 16 is set when the BCU detects high-voltage battery temperature is greater than 60C for 6.4 seconds. Possible Causes FMI 0 - PEC - Battery Fan - Battery Fan Air Filter - Battery Fan Relay power supply harness - Battery Fan Relay - Battery Fan Exhaust Screen Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 82 is set the following conditions will occur: The amber Check Hybrid lamp will display Fault is stored in HCM memory Inverter shuts high-voltage system off HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode Transmission defaults start gear to 1st Note: The conditions above are only present for FMI 0. 274 Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 82 Isolation Procedures Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger Warnings and Cautions A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. DANGER HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE You will be severly injured or killed if you do not follow the procedure. Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. WARNING To reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE 275 Fault Code 82 Isolation Procedures Connector Views Connector Views HCM 30 86 87 85 26 86 87 85 30 Battery Fan
Typical Relay Switch Battery Fan Relay 24V Truck Battery 2 4 V
P l u s 4 Battery Fan Return PEC 12 Ground 14 Battery Fan Supply Cooling Fan Plus Cooling Fan Minus Harness Front View (HCM - Hybrid System Interface Connector)
37 38 35 36 1 6 7 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations 19 - Way Mating Connector View (PEC - Low Voltage Connector) 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 276 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 82 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Key off. 3. Follow Hybrid Shutdown Procedure found at front of book, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage. 4. What Faults are present. If Fault Code 82 FMI 0 is listed Go to STEP B If Fault Code 82 FMI 16 is listed Test complete. FMI 16 requires no action or replacement. STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Remove and inspect the Air filter on the PEC inlet and the exhaust screen on the PEC outlet. If the air filter and screen are clean and free from debris Go to STEP C If the air filter is dirty or the exhaust screen is plugged Replace the Air Filter and clean the Exhaust Screen. Go to STEP V WARNING 277 Fault Code 82 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Connect ServiceRanger to the 9-pin diagnostic connector in the cab. 3. Key on. 4. Go to Product Tests and select Battery Fan Relay. 5. Check for airflow from the front and rear air ports in the PEC. If airflow can be felt from the PEC air inlet and exhaust Go to STEP E If airflow can not be felt from the PEC air inlet and exhaust Go to STEP D STEP D Procedure Condition Action 1. Key on. 2. Disconnect the 19-way connector at the PEC. 3. Measure voltage at the 19-way connector from pin 12 to pin 14. If voltage between pins 12 and 14 is +/- 0.2 volts of battery voltage Replace the PEC. Go to STEP V If voltage between pins 12 and 14 is outside of range Repair Battery Fan Relay circuit. Refer to OEM. STEP E Procedure Condition Action 1. Is fault code 105 FMI 29 listed active Fault code 105 FMI 29 is active Replace the PEC. Go to STEP V Fault code 105 FMI 29 is not active Using ServiceRanger go to Advanced Product Functions menu and select the HCM option. Download the Snapshot file and contact Eaton at 1-800-826- HELP (4357). 278 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 82 Isolation Procedures STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 82 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 82 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 279 Fault Code 83 Isolation Procedures Invalid Shift Range SA 3 SPN 751 SID 18 PID 18 FMI 12, 13 Overview The Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) is connected to the shift device, which sends driver mode selection data. The only compatible shift devices are the Eaton Push Button Shift Control (PBSC) and OEM supplied shift lever (if equipped with park). The TECU checks the vehicle for the type of shift device during the first power-up. Conditions to Run Fault The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. The TECU System Battery Voltage Low Fault is not active. The TECU is being powered up for the first time and no shift device has been configured. Conditions to Set Fault Fault Code 83 is set when redundant sensor voltages do not agree. Possible Causes Faulty Sensors Harness TECU Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 83 is set the following conditions will occur: A F will show in the gear display Fault is stored in TECU memory TECU changes to AutoShift control The engine will not crank Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. 280 Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 83 Isolation Procedures Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit Digital Volt/Ohm Meter ServiceRanger Warnings and Cautions A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. DANGER HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE You will be severly injured or killed if you do not follow the procedure. Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. WARNING To reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE 281 Fault Code 83 Isolation Procedures Connector Views Connector Views Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Disconnect the 4-way connector to the park pawl actuator. 2. Key on. 3. Check for 24V supply at 4- pin connector at pins 1 and 2. If voltage between pins 1 and 2 is +/- 0.2 volts of battery voltage Go to STEP B If voltage is outside the range Go to STEP D Harness Front View (TECU - Vehicle Interface Connector) 37 38 35 36 1 6 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 7 NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations Park Pawl Actuator 3 1 4 2 Park Pawl Actuator Park Pawl Actuator Park Pawl Actuator Park Pawl Actuator 17 16 15 31 Shift Return (Minus) Shift Control Input 1 Shift Control (Plus) Shift Control Input 2 TECU 2 3 4 1 4-Pin Park Pawl Actuator Connector 282 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 83 Isolation Procedures STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. With the actuator/shift lever in the Neutral position check voltage on pins: 3 to ground 4 to ground If voltage is between 2.25V and 2.75 V Go to STEP C If voltage is outside the range Replace Sensor. Go to STEP V STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Disconnect the TECU Vehicle Harness 38-way connector. 2. Check continuity between: 38-way connector pin 15 and 4-pin connector pin 4 38-way connector pin 16 and 4-pin connector pin 3 If continuity is okay Replace the TECU. Go to STEP V If an open is found Repair or replace the Harness. Go to STEP V STEP D Procedure Condition Action 1. Disconnect the TECU Vehicle Harness 38-way connector. 2. Check continuity between: 38-way connector pin 17 and 4-pin connector pin 1 38-way connector pin 31 and 4-pin connector pin 2 If continuity is okay Replace the TECU. Go to STEP V If an open is found Repair or replace the Harness. Go to STEP V 283 Fault Code 83 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 83 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 83 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 284 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 83 Isolation Procedures 285 Fault Code 84 Isolation Procedures Shift Control Device Not Configured Fault SA 3 SPN 751 MID 130 SID 18 FMI 13, 14 Overview The Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) is connected to the shift device, which sends driver mode selection data. The only compatible shift device is the Eaton Push Button Shift Control (PBSC) and OEM supplied shift lever (if equipped with park). The TECU checks the vehicle for the type of shift device during the first power-up. Note: This fault code will only be set active. Conditions to Run Fault The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. The TECU System Battery Voltage Low Fault is not active. The TECU is being powered up for the first time and no shift device has been configured. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 13 is set when the TECU powers-up the first time and fails to recognize any valid shift device connected to the vehicle within five seconds. Possible Causes FMI 13 OEM Wiring Harness between TECU and shift control device is disconnected PBSC FMI 14 OEM Wiring Harness between TECU and shift control device is disconnected Shift Lever Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 84 is set the following conditions will occur: The Service lamp may or may not come on depending on the failure. Fault is stored in TECU memory. TECU changes to AutoShift Fallback mode. The engine will not crank. 286 Shift Control Device Not Configured Fault Fault Code 84 Isolation Procedures Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit Digital Volt/Ohm Meter ServiceRanger 287 Fault Code 84 Isolation Procedures Connector Views Connector Views Harness Front View (TECU - Vehicle Interface Connector) 37 38 35 36 1 6 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 7 Harness Front View (Push Button Shift Control 30-Way Connector) A B C D E F G H J K 1 2 3 A1 A3 K1 K3 TECU PBSC 28 27 F2 F1 31 25 J3 C1 B3 HIL High HIL Low Shift Power (Plus) Shift Return (Minus) HIL High HIL Low Shift Power (Plus) Shift Return (Minus) VDash Dimmer NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations Shift Lever Controller 3 1 4 2 Park Pawl Actuator Park Pawl Actuator Park Pawl Actuator Park Pawl Actuator 17 16 15 31 Shift Return (Minus) Shift Control Input 1 Shift Control (Plus) Shift Control Input 2 TECU 2 3 4 1 4-Pin Park Pawl Actuator Connector 288 Fault Code 84 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Key on and observe the Push Button Service lamp If red Service lamp comes on Go to STEP B If red Service lamp does not turn on Go to STEP C If FMI 14 is present Call 1-800-826-HELP (4357). Go to STEP V STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off and on while observing the green mode lamps on the PBSC If green Mode lamps turn on Go to STEP F If green Mode lamps do not turn on Replace PBSC. Go to STEP V STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Disconnect the PBSC 30-way connector 3. Key on. 4. Measure the voltage between pins J3 and C1 on the 30-way connector If voltage is within 0.6 volts of battery voltage Replace the PBSC. Go to STEP V If voltage is out of range Go to STEP D 289 Fault Code 84 Isolation Procedures STEP D Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Disconnect negative battery cable. 3. Disconnect vehicle harness 38-way connector. 4. Measure the resistance between pin J3 on the shift control 30-way connector and the pin 25 on the vehicle harness 38-way connector If resistance between pins J3 and pin 25 is 0-0.3 ohms Go to STEP E If resistance is out of range Repair the vehicle harness between the PBSC and the transmission ECU. Go to STEP V STEP E Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Disconnect negative battery cable. 3. Disconnect vehicle harness 38-way connector. 4. Measure the resistance between the following: Pin C1 on the shift control 30-way connector and pin 31 on the vehicle harness 38-way connector Pin C1 on the shift control and ground If resistance between pins C1 and pin 25 is 0-0.3 ohms and resistance between pin C1 and ground is 10K ohms or greater Replace the Transmission ECU (only if fault code is active). Go to STEP V If resistance is out of range Repair the vehicle harness between the PBSC and the transmission ECU. Go to STEP V 290 Fault Code 84 Isolation Procedures STEP F Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Disconnect the shift control 30-way connector 3. Key on. 4. Measure the AC voltage between pins F1 and F2 If voltage is 0.1 volts AC or greater Replace the push button shift control (PBSC). Go to STEP V Note: Make sure the meter is on the AC auto feature or set to the AC 10 volts scale If voltage is 0.1 volts AC or less Go to STEP G STEP G Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Disconnect negative battery cable. 3. Disconnect vehicle harness 38-way connector. 4. Measure the resistance between the following: Pin F1 on the shift control 30-way connector and pin 28 on the vehicle harness 38-way connector Pin F1 on the shift control 30-way connector and ground If resistance between pins F1 and pin 28 is 0-0.3 ohms and resistance between pin F1 and ground is 10K ohms or greater Go to STEP H If resistance is out of range Repair the vehicle harness between the PBSC and the transmission ECU. Go to STEP V 291 Fault Code 84 Isolation Procedures STEP H Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Disconnect negative battery cable. 3. Disconnect vehicle harness 38-way connector. 4. Measure the resistance between the following: Pin F2 on the shift control 30-way connector and pin 27 on the vehicle harness 38-way connector Pin F2 on the shift control 30-way connector and ground If resistance between pins F2 and pin 27 is 0-0.3 ohms and resistance between pin F2 and ground is 10K ohms or greater Replace the Transmission ECU. Go to STEP V If resistance is out of range Repair the vehicle harness between the PBSC and the transmission ECU. Go to STEP V 292 Fault Code 84 Isolation Procedures STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 84 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 84 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 293 Fault Code 85 Isolation Procedures Shift Control Device Incompatible Fault SA 3 SPN 639 MID 130 SID 18 FMI 12 Overview The Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU) is connected to the shift device, which sends driver mode selection data. The TECU checks the vehicle for the type of PBSC device during the first power-up to determine, if a compatible model is being used. Conditions to Run Fault The TECU ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. The TECU System Battery Voltage Low Fault is not active The HIL Link Fault is not active. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 12 is set anytime the TECU powers-up and detects a non-compatible shift control device, or it does not receive a component I.D. ten seconds after power-up. Possible Causes FMI 12 - Shift Control Device Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 85 is set the following conditions will occur: Fault is stored in TECU memory TECU changes to AutoShift Fallback mode The engine will not crank. Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit 294 Shift Control Device Incompatible Fault Fault Code 85 Isolation Procedures Digital Volt/Ohm Meter ServiceRanger 295 Fault Code 85 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures Note: No Schematic for this Code. Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature. Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Select the Roadranger Configurations menu and view the Transmission selection. 3. View the Push-button Type field for one of the following options: EARNDM = Used with EH-8E306A- UPG transmissions (shown on transmission tag) ERNDM = Used with EH-8E306A- UP transmissions (shown on transmission tag) RNDML = Used with EH-8E306A- CD and EH- 8E306A-U transmissions (shown on transmission tag) If the Push-button Type field matches the push-button installed in the vehicle Go to STEP B If the Push-button Type field does not match the push-button installed in the vehicle Change the Push-button Type Field or Push-button to match the transmission model number shown on the transmission tag. Use Step A.3. to determine correct push-button for each model. 296 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 85 Isolation Procedures STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. View the Hybrid Control Module selection under the Roadranger Configurations option in ServiceRanger. 2. View the System Configuration field for one of the following options: UPG = Used in EH- 8E306A-UPG transmission UP = Used in EH- 8E306A-UP transmissions CD or U = Used in EH-8E306A-CD and EH-8E306A-U transmissions 3. Compare the HCM System Configurations selection to the TECU Push-button Type selection. If HCM System Configuration and TECU Push-button Type are the same Contact Eaton at 1-800-826- HELP (4357). If HCM System Configuration and TECU Push-button Type are different Install a HCM with the correct configuration to match the transmission tag. Go to STEP V 297 Fault Code 85 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 85 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 85 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 298 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 85 Isolation Procedures 299 Fault Code 88 Isolation Procedures Inverter CAN Message Fault (HCM) SA 239 SPN 520223 FMI 2, 9 Overview The Inverter communicates with the Battery Control Unit (BCU) located in the Power Electronics Carrier (PEC) and the Hybrid Control Module (HCM) on the Controller Area Network (CAN) high- speed proprietary data link. The data link is a two wire twisted pair with two 120 ohm resistors located in the link. Conditions to Run Fault The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. The HCM CAN data link fault is not active. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 9 is set when the HCM has not received a Inverter message for 30 consecutive message cycles. FMI 2 is only active in Product Diagnostic Mode and will set if 3 consecutive Inverter messages are not received by the HCM. Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25. Possible Causes FMI 9, 2 - Inverter - CAN data link Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 88 is set the following conditions will occur: The amber Check Hybrid lamp will display Fault is stored in HCM memory Electric motor/generator assist and regen are disabled, however, the high-voltage relays will remain powered. HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode Transmission defaults start gear to 1st Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. 300 Connector Views Fault Code 88 Isolation Procedures Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit Digital Volt/Ohm Meter ServiceRanger Connector Views 27 28 5 4 HCM Inverter CAN - High (Vehicle) CAN - Low (Vehicle) CAN - High CAN - Low Harness Front View (HCM - Vehicle Interface Connector) 37 38 35 36 1 6 7 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations 10 20 30 40 1 11 21 31 Deutsch 40-Way Mating Connector View (Inverter - Low Voltage Connector) 301 Fault Code 88 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector 2. Perform Electrical Pretest and Hybrid Electrical Pretest. If no issues are found during the Hybrid Electrical Pretest Go to STEP B If issue was repaired during the Hybrid Electrical Pretest Go to STEP V STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage 3. Disconnect Inverter 40-way connector 4. Measure resistance between Inverter 40-way connector pins 5 and 4 If resistance between pins 5 and 4 is between 50-70 ohms Replace Inverter. Go to STEP V Note: Make sure the volt/ohm meter is on the proper scale (around 200 ohm scale) If resistance is outside of range Repair CAN data link Harness. Go to STEP V WARNING 302 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 88 Isolation Procedures STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable 3. Key on 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 88 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing If code other than 88 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 303 Fault Code 89 Isolation Procedures Battery Control Unit CAN Message Fault (HCM) SA 239 SPN 520234 FMI 2, 9 Overview The Hybrid Control Module (HCM) communicate with the Inverter communicates with the Battery Control Unit (BCU) located in the Power Electronics Carrier (PEC) and the HCM on the Controller Area Network (CAN) high-speed proprietary data link. The data link is a two wire twisted pair with two 120 ohm resistors located in the link. Conditions to Run Fault The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. The HCM CAN data link fault is not active. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 2 is only active in Product Diagnostic Mode and will set if 3 consecutive BCU messages are not received by the HCM. FMI 9 is set when the HCM has not received a BCU 1 message for 30 consecutive message cycles. Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25. Possible Causes FMI 2, 9 - Inverter - CAN data link from PEC to Inverter - PEC Fallback Mode When Faults is Set When Fault Code 89 is set the following conditions will occur: The amber Check Hybrid lamp will display Fault is stored in HCM memory Electric motor/generator assist and regen are disabled, however, the high-voltage relays will remain powered HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode Transmission defaults start gear to 1st Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. 304 Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 89 Isolation Procedures Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit Digital Volt/Ohm Meter ServiceRanger Warnings and Cautions A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. DANGER HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE You will be severly injured or killed if you do not follow the procedure. Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. WARNING To reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE 305 Fault Code 89 Isolation Procedures Connector Views Connector Views 27 28 5 4 HCM Inverter CAN - High (Vehicle) CAN - Low (Vehicle) CAN - High CAN - Low Harness Front View (HCM - Vehicle Interface Connector) 37 38 35 36 1 6 7 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 PEC Harness Connector View (Deutsch 19 - Way) 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 35 34 2 1 PEC CAN - High CAN - Low NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations 10 20 30 40 1 11 21 31 Deutsch 40-Way Mating Connector View (Inverter - Low Voltage Connector) 306 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 89 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Perform Electrical Pretest and Hybrid Electrical Pretest. If no issues are found during the Hybrid Electrical Pretest Go to STEP B If issue was repaired during the Hybrid Electrical Pretest Go to STEP V STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage 3. Disconnect PEC 19-way connector 4. Measure resistance between PEC 19-way connector pins 1 and 2 Note: Make sure the volt/ohm meter is on the proper scale (around 200 ohm scale) If resistance between pin 1 and 2 is between 50-70 ohms Replace the Battery Control Unit (BCU). Go to STEP V If resistance is outside of range Go to STEP C WARNING 307 Fault Code 89 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Disconnect Inverter 40-way connector. 2. Measure resistance between: Inverter 40-way connector pin 35 and PEC 19-way connector pin 2. Inverter 40-way connector pin 34 and PEC 19-way connector 1. If resistance between pin 35 and 2 is between 0-0.2 ohms, and resistance between 34 and 1 is between 0-0.2 ohms Replace Inverter. Go to STEP V Note: Make sure the volt/ohm meter is on the proper scale (around 200 ohm scale) If resistance is outside of range Repair CAN data link Harness between Inverter and PEC. Go to STEP V STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 89 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 89 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 308 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 89 Isolation Procedures 309 Fault Code 95 Isolation Procedures 24-volt Cranking Relay Fault SA 239 SPN 520249 FMI 3, 4 Overview The 24-volt Cranking Relay is wired into the Hybrid Control Module (HCM) on the coil side of the relay. At key on, the HCM determines the starting method (High-Voltage Motor/Generator, or Engine Starter) to use. If the HCM uses the Motor/Generator to start the engine, the clutch is closed, the 24-volt cranking relay is de-energized, which disconnects the main battery power supply to the Start Enable Relay. If the HCM decides to use the standard engine starter, the 24-volt Cranking Relay is energized suppling battery power to the Start Enable Relay main feed, which then powers the starter solenoid. Conditions to Run Fault The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. Engine speed is 0 RPM or unknown Conditions to Set Fault FMI 3 if the HCM detects am open or short to vbatt in the control circuit of the 24-volt cranking relay for 1 second or greater. FMI 4 is set if the HCM detects a short to ground in the control circuit of the 24-volt cranking relay for 1 second or greater. Note: When troubleshooting an inactive code refer to the Product Diagnostic Mode (PDM) on page 25. Possible Causes FMI 3,4 - Vehicle harness from HCM to 24-volt Cranking Relay - 24-volt Cranking Relay - HCM Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 95 is set the following conditions will occur: The amber Check Hybrid lamp will display Fault is stored in HCM memory If the fault sets at power-up the engine will crank, provided the high-voltage batteries have a sufficient State of Charge (SOC). If the fault sets while driving, the vehicle will continue to operate 310 Connector Views Fault Code 95 Isolation Procedures Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit Digital Volt/Ohm Meter ServiceRanger Connector Views HCM 30 86 87 85 32 86 87 85 Crank Enable Plus
P l u s 4 Crank Enable Minus 26 Crank Enable Latch AutoShift Start Enable Relay (30) NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations 311 Fault Code 95 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Swap the 24V cranking relay with another relay and see if the fault returns If the fault does not return with new relay Replace 24V cranking relay. Go to STEP V If the fault returns with new relay Go to STEP B STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. What FMIs were listed from Step A. If FMI 3 is listed Go to STEP C Note: The 24-volt Cranking Relay must be wired according to Eaton Hybrid requirements (shown on previous page) for this test to work properly. If wired differently, consult OEM for correct wiring schematic. If FMI 4 is listed Go to STEP E STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Disconnect negative battery cable. 3. Disconnect the HCM vehicle harness 38-way connector 4. Measure the resistance between HCM vehicle harness 38-way connector pins 32 and 4 If resistance between 32 and 4 is 40-120 ohms Go to STEP D If resistance is outside of range Repair the vehicle harness for an open circuit. Go to STEP V 312 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 95 Isolation Procedures STEP D Procedure Condition Action 1. Key on. 2. Measure voltage between HCM vehicle harness 38-way connector pin 32 and ground at key on. If voltage between pin 32 and ground is 5 volts Replace the HCM (only if fault code is active).Go to STEP V If voltage between pin 32 and ground is 24 volts Repair the short to vbatt on the harness. Go toSTEP V STEP E Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Disconnect negative battery cable. 3. Disconnect the HCM harness 38-way connector. 4. Measure voltage between HCM vehicle harness 38-way connector pin 32 and ground. If voltage between pin 32 and ground is 10K ohms or greater Replace the HCM (only if fault code is active).Go to STEP V If resistance is outside of range Repair the vehicle harness for a short to ground. Go to STEP V 313 Fault Code 95 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 95 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 95 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 314 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 95 Isolation Procedures 315 Fault Code 101 Isolation Procedures High Voltage Battery Fault SA 239 SPN 520238 FMI 0, 22 - 31 Overview The High-Voltage Batteries are 172 volts each connected in series to produce 340 volts DC. The Battery Control Unit located in the Relay Box communicates with each battery to determine temperature, SOC, and voltage. This information is then sent to the Inverter. Conditions to Run Fault The Inverter enable voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 16 volts. The Battery Control Unit ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 16 volts. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 0,22-31 are set for various internal High-Voltage Battery failures. Possible Causes FMI 0, 22-31 - PEC Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 101 is set the following conditions will occur: The red Stop Hybrid lamp will display for FMI 0 The amber Check Hybrid lamp will display for FMI 22-29 Fault is stored in HCM memory Depending on the FMI the Inverter or HCM shuts the high-voltage system off HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode Transmission defaults start gear to 1st Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger 316 Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 101 Isolation Procedures Warnings and Cautions A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Note: No Schematic for this Code. Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature. DANGER HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE You will be severly injured or killed if you do not follow the procedure. Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. WARNING To reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE 317 Fault Code 101 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Key off. 3. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure found at front of book, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage. 4. What FMIs are present If Fault Code 101, FMI 27 or 28 are listed with an active Fault Code 101 FMI 26 Replace the PEC. Go to STEP V If Fault Code 101, FMI 27 or 28 are not listed with an active Fault Code 101 FMI 26 Go to STEP B If Fault Code 101 FMI 22-25 are listed Replace the PEC. Go to STEP V If Fault Code 101 FMI 29 is listed Go to STEP C If Fault Code 101 FMI 30 or 31 are listed Test complete. FMIs 30 and 31 require no action or replacement. STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. View the Data Monitor parameter PID 133 Battery SOC If PID 133 Battery SOC is less than 80 percent Replace the PEC. Go to STEP V If PID 133 Battery SOC is greater than 80 percent Contact Eaton at 1-800-826- HELP (4357). WARNING 318 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 101 Isolation Procedures STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. View the Data Monitor parameter PID 133 Battery SOC If PID 133 Battery SOC is greater than 10 percent Replace the PEC. Go to STEP V If PID 133 Battery SOC is less than 10 percent Contact Eaton at 1-800-826- HELP (4357). STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 101 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 101 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 319 Fault Code 103 Isolation Procedures Battery Control Unit Communication Fault SA 239 SPN 520265 FMI 22 - 26 Overview The High-Voltage Batteries each contain a cell controller that communicates over a twisted pair data link to the Battery Control Unit (BCU). The Battery Control Unit located in the Relay Box communicates with each battery to determine temperature, SOC, and voltage. This information is then sent to the Inverter. Conditions to Run Fault The Inverter enable voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 16 volts. The Battery Control Unit ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 16 volts. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 22 is set when the BCU fails to communicate over the CAN data link for 30 ms. FMI 23 is set when the BCU fails to receive HCM data over the CAN data link for 2.5 seconds or greater after communication is established. FMI 24 is set when the BCU fails to receive Inverter data over the CAN data link for 2.5 seconds or greater after communication is established. FMI 25 is set when the BCU fails to transmit anything over the data link for 2 seconds. FMI 26 is set when the BCU detects an error on initial check. Possible Causes FMI 26 - Relay box FMI 22, 25 - Relay box - CAN data link between PEC and Inverter FMI 23 - Relay box - CAN data link between PEC and HCM FMI 24 - Relay box - Inverter - CAN data link between PEC and Inverter Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 103 is set the following conditions will occur: The amber Check Hybrid lamp will display Fault is stored in HCM memory 320 Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 103 Isolation Procedures Inverter shuts high-voltage system off HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode Transmission defaults start gear to 1st Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger Warnings and Cautions A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. DANGER HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE You will be severly injured or killed if you do not follow the procedure. Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. WARNING To reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE 321 Fault Code 103 Isolation Procedures Connector Views Connector Views 27 28 5 4 HCM Inverter CAN - High (Vehicle) CAN - Low (Vehicle) CAN - High CAN - Low Front Harness View (HCM - Vehicle Interface Connector) 37 38 35 36 1 6 7 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 19 - Way Mating Connector View (PEC - Low Voltage Connector) 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 35 34 2 1 PEC CAN - High CAN - Low NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations 10 20 30 40 1 11 21 31 Deutsch 40-Way Mating Connector View (Inverter - Low Voltage Connector) 322 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 103 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Key on 3. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector 4. Perform Electrical Pretest and Hybrid Electrical Pretest If no issues are found during either Electrical Test Go to STEP B If issue was repaired during either Electrical Test Go to STEP V STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage 3. What Faults are present If Fault Code 103 FMI 26 is listed Replace PEC. Go to STEP V If Fault Code 103 FMI 22, 23, 24, or 25 are listed with an active fault code 111 Go to procedure for Fault Code 111 on page 357 If fault code 88 or 89 are listed Go to procedure for Fault Code 88 on page 299 or 89 on page 303 WARNING 323 Fault Code 103 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable 3. Key on 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete If code 103 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 103 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 324 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 103 Isolation Procedures 325 Fault Code 105 Isolation Procedures Battery Control Unit Fault SA 239 SPN 520240 FMI 22 - 30 Overview The High-Voltage Batteries each contain a cell controller that communicates over a twisted pair data link to the Battery Control Unit (BCU). The Battery Control Unit located in the Relay Box communicates with each battery to determine temperature, State of Charge (SOC), and voltage. This information is then sent to the Inverter. Conditions to Run Fault The Inverter enable voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 16 volts. The Battery Control Unit ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 16 volts. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 22-30 are set for various internal Battery Control Unit failures. Possible Causes FMI 22-30 - Relay box Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 105 is set the following conditions will occur: The amber Check Hybrid lamp will display Fault is stored in HCM memory Inverter shuts high-voltage system off HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode Transmission defaults start gear to 1st Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. 326 Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 105 Isolation Procedures Required Tools Basic Hand Tools High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger Warnings and Cautions A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Note: No Schematic for this Code. Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature. DANGER HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE You will be severly injured or killed if you do not follow the procedure. Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. WARNING To reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE 327 Fault Code 105 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. 2. Key off. 3. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage 4. What FMIs are present If Fault Code 105, FMI 23-29 is listed Replace PEC. Go to STEP V If Fault Code 105, FMI 30 is listed Go to STEP B If Fault Code 105, FMI 22 is listed Key off and back on. If fault is still present at key on, Replace PEC. Go to STEP V WARNING 328 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 105 Isolation Procedures STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage 2. Disconnect the AC high- voltage connector at the Motor / Generator 3. With the AC cable disconnected at both ends, measure resistance to cable shielding at all three terminals. Note: Cable should be flexed while measuring If Open or OL on meter Replace PEC If any resistance/continuity is found Replace AC High Voltage Cable. Go to STEP V WARNING 329 Fault Code 105 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable 3. Key on 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 105 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 105 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 330 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 105 Isolation Procedures 331 Fault Code 107 Isolation Procedures High Voltage Battery Leak Detection Fault SA 239 SPN 520242 FMI 1 Overview The Battery Control Unit (BCU) continuously monitors the vehicle to detect a high-voltage leak. The circuit is connected to 3 locations on the DC high-voltage line with the opposite end connected to the chassis through a resistor. Conditions to Run Fault The Inverter enable voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 16 volts. The Battery Control Unit ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 16 volts. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 1 is set when resistance between high-voltage cable and inverter case is less than 82k ohms for 1.2 seconds. Possible Causes FMI 1 - High-voltage cable insulation damage - High-voltage component leaking Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 107 is set the following conditions will occur: The amber Check Hybrid lamp will display Fault is stored in HCM memory Inverter shuts high-voltage system off HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode Transmission defaults start gear to 1st Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 332 Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 107 Isolation Procedures ServiceRanger Megatest Meter AMB-45 Warnings and Cautions A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Note: No Schematic for this Code. Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature. WARNING To reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE DANGER HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE You will be severly injured or killed if you do not follow the procedure. Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. 333 Fault Code 107 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Key on 2. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector If fault code 107 is active Go to STEP B If fault code 107 is inactive Test complete. Go to STEP V STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage 3. Disconnect the Inverter DC connector at the PEC 4. Measure the resistance to shield at the DC cable connector on both the positive and negative terminals If Open or OL on meter Go to STEP I If any resistance/continuity is found Go to STEP C WARNING 334 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 107 Isolation Procedures STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage 2. Disconnect the DC connector at the Inverter 3. With the DC cable disconnected at both ends measure the resistance to cable shielding at both the positive and negative terminals If Open or OL on meter Go to STEP D If any resistance/continuity is found Replace DC high-voltage cable between the PEC and Inverter. Go to STEP V WARNING 335 Fault Code 107 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP D Procedure Condition Action 1. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage 2. Measure the resistance to ground at the Inverter DC connector on both positive and negative terminals If Open or OL on meter Possible error with testing. Go to STEP V If any resistance/continuity is found Go to STEP E STEP E Procedure Condition Action 1. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage 2. Disconnect the AC connector at the Inverter 3. Measure the resistance to ground on all three terminals at the AC cable If Open or OL on meter Go to STEP F If any resistance/continuity is found Go to STEP G WARNING WARNING 336 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 107 Isolation Procedures STEP F Procedure Condition Action 1. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage 2. Measure the resistance to ground at all three terminals at the Inverter AC connector If Open or OL on meter Possible error with testing. Go to STEP V If any resistance/continuity is found Replace Inverter. Go to STEP V WARNING 337 Fault Code 107 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP G Procedure Condition Action 1. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage 2. Disconnect the AC high- voltage connector at the Motor/Generator 3. With the AC cable disconnected at both ends, measure resistance to cable shielding at all three terminals If Open or OL on meter Go to STEP H If any resistance/continuity is found Replace AC High Voltage Cable. Go to STEP V WARNING 338 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 107 Isolation Procedures STEP H Procedure Condition Action 1. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage 2. Measure the resistance to ground at the Motor/ Generator AC connector If Open or OL on meter Possible error with testing. Go to STEP V If any resistance/continuity is found Replace Motor/Generator. Go to STEP V STEP I Procedure Condition Action 1. Is unit supplied with a DC/DC converter or APG? Yes Go to STEP J No Replace PEC. Go to STEP V WARNING 339 Fault Code 107 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP J Procedure Condition Action 1. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage 2. Disconnect 24V positive and negative cables from DC/DC converter 3. Disconnect the PEC to DC/ DC converter DC cable at the PEC 4. Measure the resistance to ground at the DC cable connector on both the positive and negative terminals If Open or OL on meter Possible error in testing. Go to STEP V if vehicle does not have an APG. Go to STEP M if vehicle is equipped with APG If any resistance/continuity is found Go to STEP K WARNING 340 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 107 Isolation Procedures STEP K Procedure Condition Action 1. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage 2. Disconnect the high-voltage DC cable at the DC/DC converter 3. With the DC cable disconnected at both ends, measure resistance to cable shielding at positive and negative terminals If Open or OL on meter Go to STEP L If any resistance/continuity is found Replace High Voltage DC Cable. Go to STEP V WARNING 341 Fault Code 107 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP L Procedure Condition Action 1. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage 2. Measure the resistance to ground at the DC/DC Converter high-voltage DC connector at both positive and negative terminals If Open or OL on meter Possible error with testing. Go to STEP V If any resistance/continuity is found Replace DC/DC Converter. Go to STEP V WARNING 342 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 107 Isolation Procedures STEP M Procedure Condition Action 1. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage 2. Disconnect the APG DC high-voltage cable at the PEC 3. Measure the resistance to ground at the DC cable connector on both the positive and negative terminals If Open or OL on meter Replace the PEC. Go to STEP V If any resistance/continuity is found Go to STEP N WARNING 343 Fault Code 107 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP N Procedure Condition Action 1. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage 2. Disconnect the high-voltage DC cable at the APG 3. With the DC cable disconnected at both ends measure the resistance from positive and negative terminals to cable shielding at PEC cable end If Open or OL on meter Go to STEP O If any resistance/continuity is found Replace DC High Voltage Cable. Go to STEP V WARNING 344 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 107 Isolation Procedures STEP O Procedure Condition Action 1. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage 2. Measure the resistance to ground at APG high-voltage DC connector pins 1(+) and 4(-) If Open or OL on meter Possible error with testing. Go to STEP V If any resistance/continuity is found Replace APG. Go to STEP V WARNING 345 Fault Code 107 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on. 4. Clear codes. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/ Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 107 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 107 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 346 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 107 Isolation Procedures 347 Fault Code 108 Isolation Procedures Battery Control Unit Power Supply Fault SA 239 SPN 520268 FMI 3, 4 Overview The High-Voltage Batteries are 172 volts each connected in series to produce 340 volts DC. The Battery Control Unit located in the Relay Box receives 24-volts ignition power and ground from the Inverter. Conditions to Run Fault The HCM Inverter enable voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 16 volts. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 3 is set when the BCU detects the Inverter enable voltage is greater than 16 volts for 1 second. FMI 4 is set when the BCU detects the Inverter enable voltage is less than 7 volts for 1 second. Possible Causes FMI 4 - Relay Box - Low-voltage harness from Inverter to PEC - HCM - Low-voltage harness from HCM to Inverter - Inverter FMI 3 - Relay Box Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 108 is set the following conditions will occur: The amber Check Hybrid lamp will display Fault is stored in HCM memory Inverter shuts high-voltage system off HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode Transmission defaults start gear to 1st Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. 348 Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 108 Isolation Procedures Required Tools Basic Hand Tools High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger Warnings and Cautions A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death DANGER HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE You will be severly injured or killed if you do not follow the procedure. Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. WARNING To reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE 349 Fault Code 108 Isolation Procedures Connector Views Connector Views Inverter Ground BC VB_B 19 - Way Mating Connector View (PEC - Low Voltage Connector) 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 14 15 6 7 PEC Ground BC VB_B NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations Harness Front View (HCM - Hybrid System Interface Connector)
37 38 35 36 1 6 7 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 HCM Inverter Enable 2 9 Inverter Enable 10 20 30 40 1 11 21 31 Deutsch 40-Way Mating Connector View (Inverter - Low Voltage Connector) 350 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 108 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector 2. Key off 3. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage 4. What Faults are present If Fault Code 108 FMI 3 or 4 are listed with an active Fault Code 114 Go to procedure for Fault Code 114 on page 375 If Fault Code 108 FMI 3 or 4 are listed with no active Fault Code 114 Go to STEP B STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Disconnect the PEC 19-way connector. 2. Connect a multi meter to the PEC 19-way connector pin 6 and pin 7. 3. Place multimeter where it can be viewed, while standing next to the truck. 4. Key on. 5. Observe multi meter voltage reading. If voltage between pins 6 and 7 is 23 to 25 volts Replace the Battery Control Unit. Go to STEP V If voltage between pins 6 and 7 is less than 7 volts Go to STEP C WARNING 351 Fault Code 108 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Disconnect the Inverter 40-way connector. 3. Measure resistance on the following: Inverter 40-way connector pin 14 to PEC 19-way connector pin 6. Inverter 40-way connector pin 15 to PEC 19-way connector pin 7. If resistance from pin 14 to pin 6 is 0 to 0.3 ohms and resistance from pin 15 to pin 7 is 0 to 0.3 ohms Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V If resistance is outside of range Replace the low-voltage harness from the PEC to the Inverter. Go to STEP V STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete If code 108 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing If code other than 108 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 352 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 108 Isolation Procedures 353 Fault Code 110 Isolation Procedures Inverter Fault SA 239 SPN 520220 FMI 21 - 29 Overview The Inverter assembly is connected to the high-voltage DC cable from the PEC along with the high-voltage AC cable from the Motor/Generator. It inverts the DC to AC voltage to power the motor during electric assist and rectifies the AC back to DC to charge the high-voltage batteries during coasting or regenerative braking. The Inverter is also the main controller for the high- voltage system communicating to the Battery Control Module in the PEC along with communicating to the HCM for overall system operation. Conditions to Run Fault The HCM is powered and ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. The Inverter ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 21-29 are set due to various internal failures of the Inverter. Possible Causes FMI 21-29 - Inverter Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 110 is set the following conditions will occur: The amber Check Hybrid lamp will display Fault is stored in HCM memory Depending on the internal failure the Inverter may continue to operate with the fault logged, or shutdown the high- voltage system. HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode for most failures. Transmission defaults start gear to 1st Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. 354 Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 110 Isolation Procedures Required Tools Basic Hand Tools High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger Warnings and Cautions A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Note: No Schematic for this Code. Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature. DANGER HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE You will be severly injured or killed if you do not follow the procedure. Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. WARNING To reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE 355 Fault Code 110 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector 2. Key off 3. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage 4. What FMIs are present If Fault Code 110 is active Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V If Fault Code 110 is inactive Test complete STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable 3. Key on 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 110 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing If code other than 110 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 WARNING 356 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 110 Isolation Procedures 357 Fault Code 111 Isolation Procedures Inverter Communication Fault SA 239 SPN 520260 FMI 12, 19, 22- 28 Overview The Inverter communicates with the Battery Control Unit (BCU) located in the PEC and the Hybrid Control Module (HCM) on the CAN high-speed proprietary data link. The data link is a two wire twisted pair with two 120 ohm resistors located in the link. Conditions to Run Fault The HCM is powered and ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. The Inverter ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 12 or 19 are set when the CAN message does not match or EEPROM check sum error occurs at system power up. FMI 22 is set when Inverter detects an internal CAN communication failure at power-up. FMI 23, 24, 25, 27, or 28 are set when the Inverter fails to transmit, receive or obtain any messages on the CAN data link. FMI 26 is set when a specific message sent from the HCM is invalid. Possible Causes FMI 22 - Inverter FMI 23, 24, or 25 - CAN data link - Inverter - Relay Box FMI 26 - HCM FMI 27 - Vehicle Harness - Relay Box - Inverter Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 111 is set the following conditions will occur: The amber "Check Hybrid" lamp will display. Fault is stored in HCM memory. Electric Motor/Generator assist and regen are disabled, however, the high-voltage relays will remain powered. 358 Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 111 Isolation Procedures HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode. Transmission defaults start gear to 1st. Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger Note: No Schematic for this Code. Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature. Warnings and Cautions A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. DANGER HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE You will be severly injured or killed if you do not follow the procedure. Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. WARNING To reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE 359 Fault Code 111 Isolation Procedures Connector Views Connector Views 27 28 5 4 HCM Inverter CAN - High (Vehicle) CAN - Low (Vehicle) CAN - High CAN - Low Harness Front View (HCM - Vehicle Interface Connector) 37 38 35 36 1 6 7 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 Deutsch 19 - Way Mating Connector View (PEC - Low-Voltage Connector) 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 35 34 2 1 PEC CAN - High CAN - Low NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations 10 20 30 40 1 11 21 31 Deutsch 40-Way Mating Connector View (Inverter - Low Voltage Connector) 360 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 111 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Key on 3. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector 4. Perform Electrical Pretest and Hybrid Electrical Pretest If no issues are found during either Electrical Test Go to STEP B If issue was repaired during either Electrical Test Go to STEP V STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Follow Hybrid Shutdown Procedure, found at front of book, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage 3. What FMIs are present for active fault 111 If FMI 22 is listed Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V If FMI 26 is listed Replace the HCM. Go to STEP V If FMI 12, 23, 24, 25, 28 are listed Go to procedure for Fault Code 88 If FMI 27 is listed Go to STEP C If FMI 19 is listed Go to STEP D WARNING 361 Fault Code 111 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Remove 40-pin connector at the Inverter 3. Check for short to ground and 24-volt at pins 34 and 35 Short found to ground or 24V Replace the Vehicle Harness. Go to STEP V No short or open circuit found and there is an active fault 103 FMI 26 Replace PEC. Go to STEP V No short or open circuits found Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V STEP D Procedure Condition Action 1. Key on 2. Key off and allow the system to power down for at least 2 minutes. 3. Turn key to the on position If fault code 111 FMI 9 is not active Test complete. Go to STEP V If fault code 111 FMI 9 is active Go to STEP E STEP E Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Remove the 40 pin connector at the Inverter 3. Measure the voltage at Pin 1 If voltage at PIn 1 is 0 Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V If voltage at Pin 1 is the same as the battery voltage Replace the HCM. Go to STEP V 362 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 111 Isolation Procedures STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable 3. Key on 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete If code 111 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing If code other than 111 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 363 Fault Code 112 Isolation Procedures Inverter Voltage Fault SA 239 SPN 520221 FMI 3, 4 Overview The Inverter is connected to the Power Electronics Carrier through a high-voltage DC cable, which supplies 340 volts from the batteries. During operation, the Inverter monitors the input voltage to determine an over or under voltage concern. Conditions to Run Fault The Inverter ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 4 is set when the Inverter input voltage measured at the capacitor is less than 200 volts for 1 second, while the main relays in the Relay Box are on. FMI 3 is set when the Inverter input voltage measured at the capacitor is greater than 435 volts for 0.05 ms. Possible Causes FMI 3,4 - Inverter - PEC - DC high-voltage cable Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 112 is set the following conditions will occur: The amber Check Hybrid lamp will display Fault is stored in HCM memory Inverter shuts high-voltage system off HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode Transmission defaults start gear to 1st Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. 364 Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 112 Isolation Procedures Required Tools Basic Hand Tools High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger Warnings and Cautions A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. DANGER HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE You will be severly injured or killed if you do not follow the procedure. Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. WARNING To reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE 365 Fault Code 112 Isolation Procedures Connector Views Connector Views Inverter 340-Volt Pos (High Voltage) 340-Volt Neg (High Voltage) DC (-) DC (+) DC (-) DC (+) PEC High Voltage DC Connector View (Yazaki Connector) 1 2 DC(+) DC(-) 340-Volt Pos (High Voltage) 340-Volt Neg (High Voltage) NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations High-Voltage DC Connector to PEC DC(+) DC(-) 366 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 112 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Key on 3. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector 4. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage 5. What Faults are present If Fault Code 112 FMI 3 is listed Contact Eaton at 1-800-826- HELP (4357). If Fault Code 112, FMI 3 is listed with other active Hybrid Fault Codes beside 112 Go to procedure for active Hybrid Fault Code(s). If Fault Code 112 FMI 4 is listed Go to STEP B WARNING 367 Fault Code 112 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Disconnect the DC high- voltage connector at the Inverter 3. Place the multi-meter on uF option 4. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage 5. Place the leads into the two Inverter DC high-voltage sockets making sure the probes touch the terminals 6. Record the measurement after 2 minutes If the uF reading is 1104uF- 1656uF at 68F (20C) Go to STEP C If the uF reading is outside 1104uF-1656uF at 68F (20C) Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Disconnect the DC high- voltage connector from the PEC 3. Measure the resistance of each circuit on the DC cable from the PEC connector to the Inverter connector If the resistance for each circuit is 1 ohm or less Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V If resistance is out of range Replace the DC High-Voltage Cable. Go to STEP V WARNING 368 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 112 Isolation Procedures STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable 3. Key on 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 112 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 112 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 369 Fault Code 113 Isolation Procedures Inverter Current Fault SA 239 SPN 520222 FMI 6, 14 Overview The Inverter is connected to the Power Electronics Carrier (PEC) through a high-voltage DC cable which supplies 340 volts from the batteries. During operation, the Inverter monitors the output current to the Motor/Generator. Conditions to Run Fault The Inverter ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 6 is set when the Inverter IGBT current is greater than 800 amps for 0.05 ms or the motor cable is short. FMI 14 is set when motor torque commanded is zero and current is reported by the Inverter. Possible Causes FMI 6 - Inverter - Motor/Generator - AC high-voltage cables FMI 14 - Motor/Generator - AC high-voltage cables Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 113 is set the following conditions will occur: The red Stop Hybrid lamp will display for FMI 6 and a amber Check Hybrid for FMI 14 Fault is stored in HCM memory Inverter shuts high-voltage system off HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode Transmission defaults start gear to 1st Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. 370 Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 113 Isolation Procedures Required Tools Basic Hand Tools High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger Warnings and Cautions A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. DANGER HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE You will be severly injured or killed if you do not follow the procedure. Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. WARNING To reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE 371 Fault Code 113 Isolation Procedures Connector Views Connector Views High-Voltage AC Harness Connector View (Amphenol Connector) W V U W V U Inverter Motor/ Generator Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations High-Voltage AC Motor/Gen Connector View (Amphenol Connector) W U V E D F U V W F E D D E D E Loose Disconnect Loose Disconnect Loose Disconnect Loose Disconnect 372 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 113 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector 2. Key off 3. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage 4. What FMI(s) are present If Fault Code 113 FMI 6 is listed Go to STEP B If Fault Code 113 FMI 14 is listed Go to STEP D STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Visually inspect the AC cable for signs of abrasion, cuts, or exposed wiring 2. Remove the AC high-voltage cable at the Motor/Generator and Inverter 3. Measure the resistance between the following AC high-voltage cable pins: U-V V-W W-U If resistance between each phase is 5M or greater Go to STEP C An Auto Ranging Digital Volt/Ohm Meter must be used If resistance is outside of range Replace the AC High-Voltage Harness. Go to STEP V WARNING 373 Fault Code 113 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Measure the resistance of each AC high-voltage cable pin to ground If resistance between each pin and ground is 5M or greater Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V If resistance is outside of range Replace the AC High-Voltage Cable. Go to STEP V STEP D Procedure Condition Action 1. Remove the AC high-voltage cable from the Inverter and Motor/Generator 2. Measure the resistance of the AC high-voltage cable from the Inverter connector to the Motor/Generator connector on each of the following pins: U-U V-V W-W If resistance is less than 1 ohm on each circuit Replace the Motor/Generator. Go to STEP V Note: An Auto Ranging Digital Volt/Ohm Meter must be used If resistance is outside of range Replace the AC High-Voltage Harness. Go to STEP V 374 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 113 Isolation Procedures STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable 3. Key on 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete If code 113 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing If code other than 113 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 375 Fault Code 114 Isolation Procedures Inverter Power Supply Fault SA 239 SPN 520261 FMI 1, 3, 4 Overview The Inverter assembly uses a 24-volt supply provided from the HCM to power the internal control board. The HCM provides this ignition power after it completes the power-up self check. Conditions to Run Fault The HCM ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 1 is set when the internal 24v to 12v converter is out of range. FMI 3 is set when the Inverter ignition voltage is greater than 16 volts (12-volt system) and 32 volts (24-volt system) for 0.5 seconds. FMI 4 is set when the Inverter ignition voltage is less than 7 volts (12-volt system) and 16 volts (24-volt system) for 0.1 seconds. Possible Causes FMI 1 - Inverter FMI 3 - Inverter FMI 4 - HCM - Inverter - Power supply harness from HCM to Inverter Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 114 is set the following conditions will occur: The amber Check Hybrid lamp will display Fault is stored in HCM memory Electric Motor/Generator assist and regeneration are disabled, however, the high-voltage relays will remain powered HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode Transmission defaults start gear to 1st 376 Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 114 Isolation Procedures Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger Warnings and Cautions A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. DANGER HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE You will be severly injured or killed if you do not follow the procedure. Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. WARNING To reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE 377 Fault Code 114 Isolation Procedures Connector Views Connector Views Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector 2. Perform Electrical Pretest If no issues found during the Electrical Pretest Go to STEP B If issue was repaired during the Electrical Pretest Test Complete. Go to STEP V 2 7 9 6 HCM Inverter Inverter Enable Ground 1 Inverter Enable Ground 2 Front Harness View (HCM - Hybrid System Interface Connector)
37 38 35 36 1 6 7 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations 10 20 30 40 1 11 21 31 Deutsch 40-Way Mating Connector View (Inverter - Low Voltage Connector) 378 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 114 Isolation Procedures STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector 2. Key off 3. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage If FMI 1 is listed Replace the Inverter 4. What FMIs are present If Fault Code 114 FMI 3 or 4 is listed Go to STEP C If Fault Code 114 is not present Test Complete. Go to STEP V STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Disconnect the Inverter 40-way connector 3. Connect a multi meter to the Inverter 40-way connector pin 9 and pin 6 4. Place multi meter where it can be viewed while standing next to the truck 5. Key on 6. Observe multi meter voltage reading If voltage is 23 to 25 volts (24-volt system) Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V If voltage is greater than 32 volts (24-volt system) Repair the vehicle charging system. Refer to OEM for repair procedure. If voltage is outside of range Go to STEP D WARNING 379 Fault Code 114 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP D Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable 3. Disconnect the HCM System Harness 38-way connector 4. Measure resistance from the following: Inverter 40-way connector pin 9 to HCM 38-way connector pin 2. Inverter 40-way connector pin 6 to ground. If resistance from pin 1 to pin 2 is 0 to 0.3 ohms and resistance from pin 6 to ground is 0 to OL Replace the HCM. Go to STEP V If resistance is outside of range Repair the open in the power or ground harness. Go to STEP V STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable 3. Key on 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete If code 114 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing If code other than 114 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 380 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 114 Isolation Procedures 381 Fault Code 115 Isolation Procedures Inverter Temperature Fault SA 239 SPN 520223 FMI 0 Overview The Inverter temperature sensor is a thermistor located inside the Inverter that changes in value based on the temperature. The Inverter supplies a 5 volt reference voltage to the sensor and measures the volt drop in the circuit. When the Inverter temperature is warm the sensor resistance is low and the Inverter detects a low-voltage (0.1 volts equals 127C). When the Motor/Generator is cold the sensor resistance is high and the Inverter detects a high-voltage (4.0 volts equal -56C). Conditions to Run Fault The Inverter ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 0 is set with the Inverter temperature is greater than 97C (206F) for 100 ms or sensor broken. Possible Causes FMI 0 - Inverter - Liquid cooling system (low coolant, no coolant flow, coolant pump, radiator, radiator fan, reservoir) Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 115 is set the following conditions will occur: The amber Check Hybrid lamp will display Fault is stored in HCM memory Electric Motor/Generator assist and regen are disabled, however, the high-voltage relays will remain powered HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode Transmission defaults start gear to 1st Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools 382 Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 115 Isolation Procedures High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger Note: No Schematic for this Code. Note: For component location you must refer to the truck OEM's service literature. Warnings and Cautions A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. DANGER HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE You will be severly injured or killed if you do not follow the procedure. Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. WARNING To reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE 383 Fault Code 115 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9- pin diagnostic connector 2. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage 3. Key on 4. Select the Data Monitor option and view PID 120 Inverter Temperature in the Power Electronics list 5. Observe PID 120 again after 20 minutes If PID 120 Inverter Temperature lowered from the first to second reading Go to STEP B If PID 120 Inverter Temperature remained constant Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Observe the coolant level after the system has cooled to see if it is filled to the proper level If the coolant is within the recommend limits Go to STEP C If the coolant is below the recommended limits Refer to OEM for coolant type and fill procedure. Go to STEP V WARNING 384 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 115 Isolation Procedures STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Visually inspect the Hybrid liquid cooling system radiator for debris or obstruction to airflow and inspect the coolant lines for sharp bends If the radiator is free of debris and the coolant lines are not kinked Go to STEP D If the radiator is full of debris, the airflow is obstructed, or the coolant lines are kinked Repair the concern. Go to STEP V STEP D Procedure Condition Action 1. Key on 2. Connect ServiceRanger to the 9-way connector in the cab 3. Select the Advanced Product Functions option and select the Cooling Pump option. 4. Enable the Cooling Pump option If the coolant pump turns on Go to STEP E If the coolant pump fails to turn on Go to STEP F STEP E Procedure Condition Action 1. Select the Advanced Product Functions option and select the Heat Exchanger Fan option. 2. Enable the Heat Exchanger Fan option If the Heat Exchanger Fan turns on The system needs to be purged of air to allow the coolant to flow. Bleed the air by using a coolant system pressurizing tool or a vacuum tool. Go to STEP V If the Heat Exchanger Fan fails to turns on Go to STEP G 385 Fault Code 115 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP F Procedure Condition Action 1. Key on 2. Disconnect the Coolant Pump 2-way connector 3. Select the Advanced Product Functions option and select the Cooling Pump option 4. Enable the Cooling Pump option 5. Measure the voltage at the 2-way connector from pin A to B. If voltage between pins A and B is +/- 0.2 volts of battery voltage Refer to OEM for Coolant Pump concern If voltage between pins A and B is outside of range Refer to OEM for Cooing Pump power harness repair procedure. STEP G Procedure Condition Action 1. Key on 2. Disconnect the Heat Exchanger Fan 2-way connector 3. Select the Advanced Product Functions option and select the Heat Exchanger Fan option 4. Enable the Heat Exchanger Fan option 5. Measure the voltage at the 2-way connector from pin A to B. If voltage between pins A and B is +/- 0.2 volts of battery voltage Refer to OEM for Heat Exchanger Fan concern If voltage between pins A and B is outside of range Refer to OEM for Heat Exchanger Fan power harness repair procedure 386 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 115 Isolation Procedures STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable 3. Key on 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete If code 115 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing If code other than 115 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 387 Fault Code 116 Isolation Procedures High Voltage Relays Fault SA 239 SPN 521210, 521211, 521212 FMI 3, 4, 5 Overview The High-Voltage Relays are located inside the Power Electronics Carrier (PEC) in the Relay Box unit. There is one pre-charge relay on the positive side, an additional relay on the positive, and one on the negative for a total of three. These relays are normally open when the system is off. The relays are controlled through the Inverter. Conditions to Run Fault The Inverter ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 3 is set when a short is detected to vehicle 24 volt on the control side of a high-voltage relay. FMI 4 is set when a short is detected to ground on the control side of a high-voltage relay. FMI 5 is set when an open circuit is detected on the control side of a high-voltage relay. Possible Causes FMI 3, 4, 5 - Relay Box - Inertia Switch - Inverter - Vehicle wiring between the Inverter and PEC Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 116 is set the following conditions will occur: The amber Check Hybrid lamp will blink for FMI 10 Fault is stored in HCM memory The hybrid system will be offline Transmission defaults to 1st start gear in diesel only mode Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. 388 Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 116 Isolation Procedures Required Tools Basic Hand Tools High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger Warnings and Cautions A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. DANGER HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE You will be severly injured or killed if you do not follow the procedure. Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. WARNING To reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE 389 Fault Code 116 Isolation Procedures Connector Views Connector Views Inverter 340-Volt Pos (High Voltage) 340-Volt Neg (High Voltage) DC (-) DC (+) DC (-) DC (+) PEC 340-Volt Pos (High Voltage) 340-Volt Neg (High Voltage) NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations Mating Connector View (Deutsch 19 - Way) 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 2 1 2 Interlock negative Interlock positive Interlock negative Interlock positive 21 22 17 9 23 32 13 11 33 31 15 19 Precharge Plus Main Plus Plus Precharge Minus Main Minus Minus Main Plus Minus Main Minus Plus Precharge Plus Main Plus Plus Precharge Minus Main Minus Minus Main Plus Minus Main Minus Plus 10 20 30 40 1 11 21 31 Deutsch 40-Way Mating Connector View (Inverter - Low Voltage Connector) 390 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 116 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector 2. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage 3. What FMIs are present If Fault Code 116 FMI 3 is listed Go to STEP B If Fault Code 116 FMI 4 is listed Go to STEP D If Fault Code 116 FMI 5 is listed Go to STEP F STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Temporarily remove the lockout bracket and pull the 'Service Switch' out 3. Disconnect the PEC 19-pin connector 4. Measure the following connectors according to the SPN: a. SPN 521210; pins 17 and 19 to 24-volt b. SPN 521211; pins 9 and 11 to 24-volt c. SPN 521212; pins 13 and 15 to 24-volt Any resistance from PEC connector pins to 24-volt Replace PEC. Go to STEP V If meter reads OL or Open Circuit Go to STEP C WARNING 391 Fault Code 116 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Connect the PEC 19-pin connector 3. Disconnect the 40-pin Inverter connector 4. Measure the following connectors according to the SPN: a. SPN 521210; pins 21 and 31 to 24-volt b. SPN 521211; pins 22 and 32 to 24-volt c. SPN 521212; pins 23 and 33 to 24-volt Any resistance from the Inverter connector pins to 24-volt Repair vehicle harness. Go to STEP V If meter reads OL or Open Circuit Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V STEP D Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Disconnect the PEC 19-way connector 3. Temporarily remove the lockout bracket and pull the Service Switch out. 4. Measure the following connectors according to the SPN: a. SPN 521210; pin 17 to ground b. SPN 521211; pin 9 to ground c. SPN 521212; pin 13 to ground Any resistance from the PEC connectors to ground Replace PEC. Go to STEP V If meter reads OL or Open Circuit Go to STEP E 392 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 116 Isolation Procedures STEP E Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Reconnect the PEC 19-way connector 3. Disconnect the Inverter 40-way connector. 4. Measure the following connectors according to the SPN: a. SPN 521210; pin 21 to ground b. SPN 521211; pin 22 to ground c. SPN 521212; pin 23 to ground Any resistance from the Inverter connectors to ground Repair vehicle harness. Go to STEP V If meter reads OL or Open Circuit Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V STEP F Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Disconnect the PEC 19-way connector 3. Ensure the key is in the Off position 4. Temporarily remove the lockout bracket and pull the Service Switch out 5. Measure resistance at the PEC 19-way connector terminal at the following pins: SPN 521210; pins 17 to 19 SPN 521211; pins 9 to 11 SPN 521212; pins 13 to 15 If the resistance between pins 17 and 19 is 112-122 ohms and the resistance from pin 9 to 11 and pin 13 to 15 are each 33-37 ohms Go to STEP G If resistance is out of range Reset inertia switch if Pin 13 to 15 is open or OL, retest circuit. Replace PEC if circuit is still open after switch reset or the other circuits are out of range. Go to STEP V 393 Fault Code 116 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP G Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Connect the PEC 19-way connector 3. Disconnect the Inverter 40-pin connector 4. Ensure the key is in the Off position 5. Temporarily remove the lockout bracket and pull the Service Switch out 6. Measure resistance at the Inverter 40-way connector terminal at the following pins: SPN 521210; pins 21 to 31 SPN 521211; pins 23 to 33 SPN 521212; pins 22 to 32 If the resistance between pins 21 and 31 is 112-122 ohms and the resistance from pin 23 to 33 and pin 22 to 32 are each 33-37 ohms Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V If resistance is out of range Repair the vehicle harness between the PEC and Inverter. Go to STEP V STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable. 3. Key on 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Check for codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete. If code 116 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing. If code other than 116 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 394 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 116 Isolation Procedures 395 Fault Code 116 Isolation Procedures High Voltage Relays Fault SA 239 SPN 520224 FMI 10, 14, 20, 29, 30 Overview The High-Voltage Relays are located inside the Power Electronics Carrier (PEC) in the Relay Box unit. There is one pre-charge relay on the positive side, an additional relay on the positive, and one on the negative for a total of three. These relays are normally open when the system is off. The relays are controlled through the Inverter. Conditions to Run Fault The Inverter ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 10 is set when inverter capacitor voltage is less than 210 volts after 4 seconds from pre- charge relay being closed or main positive relay is not on. FMI 14 is set when the main negative relay is on and the inverter capacitor voltage decrease is less than 10-volts / 5 seconds when initial capacitor voltage was greater than 200 volts and motor speed is less than 500 RPM. FMI 20 is set when the high-voltage DC cable interlock switch is open. FMI 29 is set when battery voltage is present on the Inverter side of the main relays under Main Positive Relay open status. FMI 30 is set when battery voltage is present on the Inverter side of the main relays under Main Negative Relay open status. Possible Causes FMI 10 - High-voltage fuse - Red Service Switch - DC high-voltage cable or interlock - Inverter - Inertia switch FMI 14 - Inverter - PEC FMI 20 - DC cable interlock circuit FMI 29 - Failed Main Positive relay FMI 30 - Failed Main Negative relay 396 High Voltage Relays Fault Fault Code 116 Isolation Procedures Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 116 is set the following conditions will occur: The amber Check Hybrid lamp will be illuminated for FMI 10, 14 and 20. The Red Stop Hybrid lamp will be illuminated for FMI 29 and 30. Fault is stored in HCM memory The hybrid system will be offline Transmission defaults start gear to 1st in diesel only mode Conditions to Clear the Fault Only inactive faults can be cleared from the TECU or HCM history using ServiceRanger. The TECU will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours and the HCM will automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying inactive. Required Tools Basic Hand Tools High-Voltage Gloves J-48603 Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger 397 Fault Code 116 Isolation Procedures Warnings and Cautions Warnings and Cautions A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. DANGER HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE You will be severly injured or killed if you do not follow the procedure. Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. WARNING To reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE 398 Connector Views Fault Code 116 Isolation Procedures Connector Views Inverter 340-Volt Pos (High Voltage) 340-Volt Neg (High Voltage) DC (-) DC (+) DC (-) DC (+) PEC 340-Volt Pos (High Voltage) 340-Volt Neg (High Voltage) NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations Mating Connector View (Deutsch 19 - Way) 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 2 1 2 Interlock negative Interlock positive Interlock negative Interlock positive 21 22 17 9 23 32 13 11 33 31 15 19 Precharge Plus Main Plus Plus Precharge Minus Main Minus Minus Main Plus Minus Main Minus Plus Precharge Plus Main Plus Plus Precharge Minus Main Minus Minus Main Plus Minus Main Minus Plus 10 20 30 40 1 11 21 31 Deutsch 40-Way Mating Connector View (Inverter - Low Voltage Connector) 399 Fault Code 116 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures Check to see if the red Service Switch on the front of the PEC is pulled out. If the switch is pushed in pull the switch out and turn the ignition key off. After 2 minutes turn the ignition key on. STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector 2. Check to see if the red Service Switch on the front of the PEC is pulled out. If the switch is pushed in pull the switch out and turn the ignition key off. After 2 minutes turn the ignition key on 3. What FMIs are present If Fault Code 116 FMI 10 is listed Go to STEP B If Fault Code 116 FMI 14 is listed Go to STEP I If Fault Code 116 FMI 20 is listed Go to STEP J If Fault Code 116 FMI 29 or 30 is listed Go to STEP K IMPORTANT WARNING 400 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 116 Isolation Procedures STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Remove the PEC air filter cover 3. Reset the PEC Inertia Switch (see TRSM2000 for procedures) 4. Key on 5. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector. If Fault Code 116 FMI 10 is now active Go to STEP V If Fault Code 116 FMI 10 is still listed Go to STEP C STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Key on 2. Connect ServiceRanger to the 9-way diagnostic connector in the cab 3. Select the Data Monitor option and view Battery Voltage PID 118 (SPN 520250 J1939) from the HV Battery list if Battery Voltage PID 118 (SPN 520250 J1939) is greater than 210 volts Go to STEP D if Battery Voltage PID 118 (SPN 520250 J1939) is less than 210 volts Check main fuse in the PEC. If fuse has not failed replace PEC. Go to STEP V 401 Fault Code 116 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP D Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. If the vehicle is not equipped with a DC/DC Converter or APG skip to Step E 3. Using high-voltage gloves disconnect the DC cable for the DC/DC Converter or APG at the PEC bulkhead and cap the connector and the bulkhead terminal 4. Temporarily remove the lockout bracket and pull the Service Switch out. 5. Key on If fault code 116 FMI 10 is active with the DC/DC Converter and APG connector disconnected Go to STEP E If fault code 116 FMI 10 is not active with the DC/DC Converter and APG connector disconnected Replace the Auxiliary Relays in the PEC. Go to STEP V STEP E Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Disconnect the DC high- voltage cable at the PEC and the Inverter 3. Measure the of each high- voltage circuit on the cable Resistance of each circuit is 0 - 0.3 ohms Go to STEP F If resistance is outside of range Replace the DC High-Voltage Cable. Go to STEP V 402 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 116 Isolation Procedures STEP F Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Disconnect the PEC 19-way connector 3. Ensure the key is in the Off position 4. Temporarily remove the lockout bracket and pull the Service Switch out 5. Measure resistance at the PEC 19-way connector terminal at the following pins: Pins 17 to 19 Pins 9 to 11 Pins 13 to 15 If the resistance between pins 17 and 19 is 112-122 ohms and the resistance from pin 9 to 11 and pin 13 to 15 are each 33-37 ohms Go to STEP G If resistance is out of range Replace PEC. Go to STEP V STEP G Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Connect the PEC 19-way connector 3. Disconnect the Inverter 40-pin connector 4. Inspect the connectors for damage or corrosion 5. Ensure the key is in the Off position 6. Temporarily remove the lockout bracket and pull the Service Switch out 7. Measure resistance at the Inverter 40-way connector terminal at the following pins: Pins 21 to 31 Pins 23 to 33 Pins 22 to 32 If the resistance between pins 21 and 31 is 112-122 ohms and the resistance from pin 23 to 33 and pin 22 to 32 are each 33-37 ohms Go to STEP H If resistance is out of range Repair the vehicle harness between the PEC and Inverter. Go to STEP V 403 Fault Code 116 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP H Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Check for short between Inverter Pos (+) to Neg (-) Short from Pos to Neg Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V No continuity Replace PEC. Go to STEP V STEP I Procedure Condition Action 1. Connect ServiceRanger to the 9-way diagnostic connector in the cab 2. Select the Data Monitor option 3. View the following parameters in the HV-Battery list: Battery Pack Voltage PID 118 (SPN 520250 J1939) Battery Voltage PID 116 (SPN 520323 J1939) If the voltage readings on PID 116 and PID 118 are within 10 volts of each other Replace PEC. Go to STEP V If the voltage readings on PID 116 and PID 118 are greater than 10 volts of each other Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V STEP J Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Disconnect the DC high- voltage cables at the PEC bulkhead and at the Inverter 3. Measure the resistance between the two low voltage interlock pins on each end of the DC high-voltage cable If resistance is 0 - 0.3 ohms Replace the Inverter. Go to STEP V If resistance is outside of range Replace the DC High-Voltage Cable. Go to STEP V 404 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 116 Isolation Procedures STEP K Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. The PEC main fuse MUST be removed before the PEC to Inverter high-voltage cable is disconnected from the PEC. Reference Service manual TRSM-2000 for the main fuse removal procedure 3. Remove PEC from vehicle Replace PEC. Go to STEP V STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable 3. Key on 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete If code 116 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing If code other than 116 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 405 Fault Code 117 Isolation Procedures Battery Control Unit (BCU) Relay Cut Request Fault SA 239 SPN 520251 FMI 3, 14, 29 Overview The High-Voltage Relays are located inside the Power Electronics Carrier (PEC) in the Relay Box unit. These relays are normally open when the system is off. The relays are controlled through the Inverter and monitored through a 5-volt input from the Inverter. If the relays are open the voltage is around 5 volts and when the relays are closed the voltage is around 1 volt. Conditions to Run Fault The Inverter ignition voltage is greater than 7 volts and less than 32 volts. Conditions to Set Fault FMI 3 is set when Battery Control Unit (BCU) relay ready CAN flag is active and the relay off signal is set high for 0.02 seconds. FMI 14 is set when the BCU relay cut request is by a different active BCU fault. FMI 29 is set when the Relay Off signal line is active. Possible Causes FMI 3, 29 - Inverter - Low-voltage wire harness Fallback Mode When Fault is Set When Fault Code 117 is set the following conditions will occur: The amber Check Hybrid lamp will display Fault is stored in HCM memory Inverter shuts high-voltage system off HCM continues to control the Hybrid vehicle in a diesel only mode Transmission defaults start gear to 1st Conditions to Clear the Fault The Eaton service tool ServiceRanger may be used to clear the fault from TECU or HCM history. The TECU and HCM automatically clear the faults from history after 200 hours of the fault staying Inactive. 406 Warnings and Cautions Fault Code 117 Isolation Procedures Required Tools Basic Hand Tools High-Voltage Gloves J48603 Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger Warnings and Cautions A buffer zone must be set up and high-voltage insulated rubber gloves are required prior to working on any high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The rubber insulating gloves that are to be worn while working on the high-voltage are listed in this manual along with the glove protectors. The rubber gloves should be tested before EVERY use following the rubber insulation gloves testing found in this manual. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. Before inspecting or working on any high-voltage cables or components the 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' should be followed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. The Lock-out and Tag-out devices should only be removed by the technician that placed the Lock-out and Tag-out devices on the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be worn when working on any high-voltage cables. The 'High-Voltage Shutdown Procedure' must be followed prior to removing any high-voltage cables. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. High-voltage cables and wiring are orange in color and contain a warning label at the connectors, while high-voltage components are marked with a label. High-voltage rubber insulated gloves must be used when working on any of these components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in severe personal injury or death. WARNING To reduce risk of possible serious injury (Shock, Burn or Death): Components marked with High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE DANGER HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE You will be severly injured or killed if you do not follow the procedure. Components marked with DANGER High Voltage should be avoided. Service must be performed by qualified personnel only. 407 Fault Code 117 Isolation Procedures Connector Views Connector Views Fault Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Retrieve active fault codes and FMIs with ServiceRanger using the 9-pin diagnostic connector 2. Key off 3. Follow the Hybrid Shutdown Procedure on page 3, to avoid shock, burn, or death from improperly handled high-voltage 4. What FMIs are present If FMI 14 is listed Test complete. FMI 14 requires no action or replacement If FMI 3 or 29 are listed Go to STEP B Inverter Relay Off Deutsch 19 - Way Mating Connector View (PEC - Low Voltage Connector) 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 13 3 5 PEC Relay Off NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations 10 20 30 40 1 11 21 31 Deutsch 40-Way Mating Connector View (Inverter - Low Voltage Connector) WARNING 408 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 117 Isolation Procedures STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. View active faults to see if any of the following are listed: 76, 78, 82, 101, 103, 105, 107, 108 If any of the faults are listed with Fault Code 117 FMI 3 Go to test for faults that are active If none of the faults are listed with FMI 3 Go to STEP C If none of the faults are listed with FMI 29 Go to STEP D STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Disconnect the PEC 19-way connector 3. Disconnect the Inverter 40-way connector. 4. Measure the resistance from the PEC 19-way connector pin 5 to the Inverter 40-way connector pin 13 If the resistance between pin 5 and pin 13 is 0 - 0.3 ohms Replace Inverter. Go to STEP V If resistance is outside of range Repair the HCM Low-Voltage harness between the PEC and Inverter. Go to STEP V STEP D Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Remove the 40-pin connector from the Inverter 3. Use an ohm meter to measure the resistance from pin 3 to ground at the vehicle harness If the resistance between pin 3 to ground is 0 to 0.3 ohms Replace Inverter. Go to STEP V If resistance is outside of range Repair 40-pin vehicle harness. Go to STEP V 409 Fault Code 117 Isolation Procedures Fault Isolation Procedures STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Reconnect all connectors and the negative battery cable 3. Key on 4. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 5. Drive the vehicle and attempt to recreate the code 6. Clear codes. See Fault Code Removal/Clearing on page 17 If no codes Test complete If code 117 appears Return to STEP A to find error in testing If code other than 117 appears Go to Fault Code Isolation Procedure page 19 410 Fault Isolation Procedures Fault Code 117 Isolation Procedures 411 Fault Code 166 Isolation Procedures Instrument Cluster Message SPN 84 FMI 2, 9 Overview Fault Code 166 is generated from missing park brake message. See OEM cluster messages for any repairs. 412 Instrument Cluster Message Fault Code 166 Isolation Procedures 413 Front Box Test Front Box Test Overview This symptom-driven test is performed if a - or flashing gear is displayed on the Gear Display, and there are no active or inactive codes. Turn the key on and watch the Gear Display. If the Gear Display shows - constantly, the Transmission ECU was not able to confirm front box control. If the transmission displays a flashing gear when a forward or reverse mode is selected, the transmission is not able to engage the gear position. Note: This symptom-based test should only be performed if you were sent here from the Diagnostic Procedure and you have no active fault codes. Possible Causes Low Power to Gear Select Motor Electric Shifter Gear Select Sensor Yoke / Clutch / Main Shaft Shift Bar Housing Dragging Clutch Torque Locked in Gear Fallback Mode When Fault is Set There is no fallback mode for this symptom, however, the vehicle will either not crank if the - is present or not engage a gear if the flashing gear is present when a non-neutral gear is selected. Symptoms Power-up no crank and the gear display shows - Transmission will not engage a gear from neutral (flashing gear number is gear display). Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger 414 Connector Views Front Box Test Connector Views Note: The picture above shows the shift forks in the neutral position. Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. You should only perform this symptom test if you were sent here from the Diagnostic Procedure and you have no active fault codes 2. Key on 3. Depress N on the Push Button Shift Control 4. Observe Gear Display If Gear Display shows: N Go to STEP B If Gear Display shows: - Go to STEP C 415 Front Box Test Isolation Procedures STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Depress service brake and select D 2. Observe Gear Display If Gear Display shows a solid gear Test complete If Gear Display shows a flashing gear with no arrows Go to STEP C STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Attempt to remove any type of torque lock on the vehicles drivetrain through one of the following methods: a. Remove the driveshaft b. Lift the drive wheels off the ground c. Roll the vehicle in neutral 3. Key on 4. Observe gear display If Gear Display shows a solid N Go to STEP B If Gear Display still shows a solid - Go to STEP D STEP D Procedure Condition Action 1. Perform Electrical Pretest If no issues found during the Electrical Pretest Go to STEP E If issue was repaired during the Electrical Pretest Go to STEP A 416 Isolation Procedures Front Box Test STEP E Procedure Condition Action 1. Key on 2. Listen for noise from the Electric Shifter calibrating/ actuating then turn the key off and listen for the same noise again If the Electric Shifter can be heard calibrating/actuating Go to STEP F If the Electric Shifter cant be heard calibrating Go to STEP F STEP F Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Remove Electric Shifter from Shift Bar Housing 3. Inspect the following: Shift blocks are fastened to shift rails securely Shift rails move into each gear position Electric shifter is free from any excessive lube contamination buildup Two gear positions can not be engaged at the same time If no problem found and you could not hear the electric shifter actuation in the previous step Replace the TECU. Go toSTEP V If no problem found and you could hear the electric shifter actuation in the previous step Replace the Electric Shifter. Go to STEP V If problem is found Repair as required. Go to STEP V 417 Front Box Test Isolation Procedures STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Reconnect all connectors 3. Place Shift Control into neutral 4. Key on If Gear Display displays a solid N Test complete If Gear Display does not display a solid N Return to STEP A to find error in testing 418 Isolation Procedures Front Box Test 419 Engine Crank Test Engine Crank Test Overview This symptom-driven test is performed if a N is displayed on the Gear Display with no active or inactive codes and the vehicle will not crank. The Hybrid Control Module (HCM) receives the input to crank from pin 20 on the HCM 38-way Vehicle Connector, which is wired to the key switch. The HCM normally powers the High-Voltage Motor/Generator to start the engine. If the Hybrid system is offline, the HCM will use the standard 24-volt starter by energizing the 24-volt Cranking relay. This relay then provides battery power to pin 30 of the Start Enable Relay, which then powers the starter solenoid. Note: This symptom-based test should only be performed if you were sent here from the Diagnostic Procedure and you have no active fault codes. Symptom Vehicle will not crank or there is a solid N in the gear display. Possible Causes 24-volt Cranking Relay Start Enable Relay OEM Vehicle Harness Engine Starter 24-volt batteries Key switch input to pin 20 of the HCM Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger 420 Engine Crank Test Wiring Schematic Engine Crank Test Engine Crank Test Wiring Schematic Harness Front View
P l u s 4 Crank Enable Minus 4 Start Enable Minus 87 86 85 30
24V Cranking Relay 26 Crank Enable Latch Start Enable Plus 32 NOTE: Refer to the Eaton Hybrid Component and Connector Location page for Connector Locations Starter solenoid Key Switch 20 Off Ignition Crank Engine Crank Request 421 Engine Crank Test Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. You should only perform this symptom test if you were sent here from the Diagnostic Procedure and you have no active fault codes 2. Key on 3. Depress N on the Push Button Shift Control Note: The ePTO lamp must be off when using the key switch to start the vehicle If N is present on the Gear Display Go to STEP B If N is not present on the Gear Display Refer to the Diagnostic Procedure for the correct Symptom based test to perform STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Key on 2. Connect ServiceRanger to the 9-pin diagnostic connector 3. Select the Data Monitor option and view the Crank Request parameter If Crank Request reads 1 (Crank) Go to Step C. If Crank Request reads 0 (No Crank) Go to Step E. STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Substitute a different start enable and 24-volt cranking relay 2. Attempt to crank engine If engine cranks Pinpoint which of the two relays was at fault and replace it.Go to STEP V If engine does not crank Go to STEP D 422 Engine Crank Test STEP D Procedure Condition Action 1. Key on Engine may crank 2. Jumper pin 87 of the start enable relay connector to battery power If engine cranks Repair open circuit between pin 87 of the start enable relay and battery. Refer to OEM for repair procedures. If engine does not crank Concern is with starter solenoid or power harness to solenoid. Refer to OEM for repair procedures STEP E Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Disconnect negative battery cable 3. Disconnect HCM vehicle harness 38-way connector 4. Key in start position 5. Measure voltage from HCM vehicle harness 38-way connector pin 20 to ground If voltage is 23-25 volts Replace the HCM. Go to STEP V If voltage is below 23 volts Repair the OEM vehicle harness. Go to STEP V STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Reconnect all connectors 3. Place Shift Control into neutral 4. Key on If engine starts Test complete If engine does not start Return to STEP A to find error in testing. WARNING 423 Hybrid Performance Test Hybrid Performance Test Overview The Hybrid System uses a combination of diesel engine and electric power to provide varying levels of torque during vehicle operation. If the Hybrid system has a fault, or if a hybrid component is above the optimum operating temperature, the vehicle will reduce the amount of available Motor/ Generator torque. Note: Some faults codes will affect the amount of torque available from the Motor/Generator and will be noticeable to the driver. Note: This symptom-based test should only be performed if you were sent here from the Diagnostic Procedure and you have no active fault codes. Symptoms Vehicle acceleration performance is not acceptable Possible Causes Hybrid liquid cooling system PEC air cooling system restriction or poor air flow Reduce engine power Truckload capacity above the rated amount Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger 424 Isolation Procedures Hybrid Performance Test Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. Key on. 2. Connect ServiceRanger to the 9-pin diagnostic connector in the cab and view the following Data Monitor parameters under the Hybrid (Engine and Brake) list: SPN 513 Actual Engine Torque SPN 518 Requested Engine Torque If actual torque is equal to requested torque Go to STEP B If actual torque is less than requested torque Refer to OEM for engine power concern. Go to STEP V STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Select the Data Monitor option and view the following parameter: Battery Temperature PID 115 If Battery temperature is below 40C Refer to OEM for engine power concern. Go to STEP V If temperature if above 40C inspect the battery cooling system for the following. Plugged intake or exhaust ports Restricted or plugged air filter Failed battery cooling fan Refer to the OEM for procedures and specifications. Make necessary and go to STEP V 425 Hybrid Performance Test Isolation Procedures STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off 2. Reconnect all connectors 3. Place Shift control into neutral. 4. Key on If vehicle exhibits normal amount of power Test complete If vehicle seems to produce lack power Return to STEP A to find error in testing 426 Isolation Procedures Hybrid Performance Test 427 Gear Engagement Test Gear Engagement Test Overview The Hybrid Control Module (HCM) normally commands the different gears shifts which are done through the Transmission Electronic Control Unit (TECU). The HCM also controls the Electric Clutch Actuator (ECA), which changes the position of the clutch. Note: This symptom-based test should only be performed if you were sent here from the Diagnostic Procedure and you have no active fault codes. Symptoms Transmission will not engage a gear from Neutral and warning tone sounds (Solid N in Gear Display). Transmission will not engage a gear from Neutral (Flashing Gear in Gear Display). This symptom is addressed in the Front Box Symptom test. Transmission will not move from a stop (Solid Gear number in Gear Display). Messages from the Body Controller to the HCM Messages from the Engine, Chassis, or Body Controller to the TECU Possible Causes Transmission Service Brake Switch Boom/Outrigger switch Required Tools Basic Hand Tools Eaton Test Adapter Kit J-43318 Digital Volt/Ohm Meter J-46708 ServiceRanger Signal Value Meaning Description Prohibit Driving 0 1 Allow Driving Prohibit Driving Body Controller is requesting the HCM not allow gear engagement from neutral. Signal Value Meaning Description Brake Switch 0 1 Not Applied Applied The ECU is confirming the current state of the service brake switch. 428 Isolation Procedures Gear Engagement Test Isolation Procedures STEP A Procedure Condition Action 1. You should only perform this symptom test if you were sent here from the Diagnostic Procedure and you have no active fault codes 2. Depress N on the Push Button Shift Control If N is present on the Gear Display Go to STEP B If N is not present on the Gear Display Refer to the Diagnostic Procedure for the correct symptom based test to perform STEP B Procedure Condition Action 1. Key on 2. Start engine 3. Depress service brake and select D If gear display shows a N and a warning tone sounds Go to STEP D If Gear Display shows a flashing gear with no arrows Go to Front Box Test If Gear Display shows a solid gear, but vehicle will not move Go to STEP C STEP C Procedure Condition Action 1. Key on. 2. Connect ServiceRanger and view the following Data Monitor parameter PID 154 Prohibit Driving Prohibit Driving reads 0 (Allow Driving) Contact Eaton at 1-800-826- HELP [4357] Prohibit Driving reads 1 (Prohibit Driving) Ensure boom and outriggers are fully retracted. Contact your OEM for repair procedures. Go to STEP V 429 Gear Engagement Test Isolation Procedures STEP D Procedure Condition Action 1. Key on 2. View the following Data Monitor parameter while depressing the service brake: SPN 597 Service Brake Status If the service brake switch status is depressed when you apply the brakes Contact Eaton at 1-800-826- HELP [4357] If the service brake switch does not change status Repair service brake wiring or switch. Contact your OEM for repair procedures. Go to STEP V STEP V Procedure Condition Action 1. Key off. 2. Reconnect all connectors. 3. Place Shift Control into neutral. 4. Key on. If the transmission will engage a gear and move from a stop Test complete. If the transmission will not engage a gear or move from a stop Return to STEP A to find error in testing. 430 Isolation Procedures Gear Engagement Test 431 Wiring Diagrams Wiring Diagram with Push Button Shift Controller 432 Wiring Diagram with Push Button Shift Controller Wiring Diagrams 433 Wiring Diagrams Wiring Diagram with Push Button Shift Con- Hybrid Transmission ECU System Harness Gear select motor Rail select motor Electric shifter A B A B Rail select sensor Gear select sensor Input shaft speed sensor Output shaft speed sensor 18 19 20 10 11 12 7 8 23 24 A B C A B C 35 37 36 38 B C A 17 31 25 D For Transmission Diagnostics 4-way B - Service Bat. + C - Service Bat. - A - Service Ignition + B C A Transmission ECU 434 Wiring Diagram with Push Button Shift Controller Wiring Diagrams 435 Connector Pin Description Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins TECU and HCM Connectors Please note the location and orientation of the HCM and TECU connectors. HCM - Vehicle Interface Connector TECU - Vehicle Interface Connector HCM - Hybrid System Interface Connector Terminal Side - Harness Connector (HCM - Vehicle Interface Connector) 37 38 35 36 1 6 7 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 Terminal Side - Harness Connector (HCM - Hybrid System Interface Connector) 37 38 35 36 1 6 7 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 Terminal Side - Harness Connector (TECU - Vehicle Interface Connector) 37 38 35 36 1 6 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 7 436 Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins Connector Pin Description The backshell should always face down on the harness connectors. 437 Connector Pin Description Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins Transmission Controller 38-Way (Vehicle Interface Connector) Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG Not Used 1 Plug J1939 Low (CAN) TECU 2 1939 Backbone B 18 TXL J1939 High (CAN) TECU 3 1939 Backbone A 18 TXL Start Enable Relay Minus TECU 4 AS Start Enable Relay 85 18 TXL Not Used 5 Plug Not Used 6 Plug Not Used 7 Plug Not Used 8 Plug Not Used 9 Plug J1587 Plus TECU 10 Splice into 1587 A 18 TXL J1587 Minus TECU 11 Splice into 1587 B 18 TXL Not Used 12 Plug Not Used 13 Plug Not Used 14 Plug Not Used 15 Plug Not Used 16 Plug Not Used 17 Plug Not Used 18 Plug Not Used 19 Plug Not Used 20 Plug Not Used 21 Plug Not Used 22 Plug Not Used 23 Plug Not Used 24 Plug Shift Control Power Minus TECU 25 PBSC J3 18 TXL Start Enable Latch TECU 26 AS Start Enable Relay 87 18 TXL HIL Low (Proprietary CAN) TECU 27 PBSC F2 18 TXL HIL High (Proprietary CAN) TECU 28 PBSC F1 18 TXL Not Used 29 Plug Not Used 30 Plug Shift Control Power Plus TECU 31 PBSC C1 18 TXL Start Enable Relay Plus TECU 32 AS Start Enable Relay 86 18 TXL Not Used 33 Plug Not Used 34 Plug 438 Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins Connector Pin Description Ignition TECU 35 10A Fused Switched Power from Ignition Bus 12 GXL or 14SXL Battery Minus TECU 36 Ground at Battery or Starter 12 GXL Not Used 37 Plug Battery Plus TECU 38 30A Fused Non- Switched 12 GXL Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG 439 Connector Pin Description Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins Hybrid Controller 38-Way (Vehicle Interface Connector) Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG Not Used 1 Plug J1939 Low (CAN) HCM 2 1939 Backbone B 18 TXL J1939 High (CAN) HCM 3 1939 Backbone A 18 TXL 24V Cranking Relay Minus HCM 4 24V Cranking Relay 85 Plug Not Used 5 Plug Not Used 6 Plug Not Used 7 Plug Not Used 8 Plug Not Used 9 Plug J1587 Plus HCM 10 Splice into 1587 18 TXL J1587 Minus HCM 11 Splice into 1587 18 TXL Not Used 12 Plug Not Used 13 Plug Not Used 14 Plug Not Used 15 Plug Not Used 16 Plug Not Used 17 Plug PTO Signal HCM 18 PTO 18 TXL Not Used 19 Plug Engine Crank Request HCM 20 Crank Position on Switch 18 TXL Not Used 21 Plug Not Used 22 Plug Service Lamp HCM 23 4-pin Service Connector D 18 TXL PTO Request (Non J1939 BCU) HCM 24 BCU 18 TXL Not Used 25 Plug 24V Cranking Relay Latch HCM 26 24V Cranking Relay 87 18 TXL CAN Low (Proprietary CAN) HCM 27 HEV Backbone B 18 TXL CAN High (Proprietary CAN) HCM 28 HEV Backbone A 18 TXL Not Used 29 Plug Not Used 30 Plug Not Used 31 Plug 24V Cranking Relay Plus HCM 32 24V Cranking Relay 86 18 TXL Not Used 33 Plug Not Used 34 Plug 440 Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins Connector Pin Description Ignition HCM 35 Fused 10A to Ignition Relay 12 GXL or 14SXL Battery Minus HCM 36 Battery Ground 12 GXL Not Used 37 Plug Battery Plus HCM 38 Fused 30A Battery 12 GXL Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG 441 Connector Pin Description Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins Hybrid Controller 38-Way (Hybrid System Interface Connector) Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG Not Used 1 Plug Inverter Enable HCM 2 Inverter 9 and 10 18 TXL Not Used 3 Plug Coolant Pump & Battery Fan Relay Minus HCM 4 Coolant Pump Relay & Battery Fan Relay 85 18 TXL High-Voltage Relay Minus HCM 5 High-Voltage Relay 4 18 TXL PTO Power Minus HCM 6 PTO 18 TXL Not Used 7 Plug Not Used 8 Plug Not Used 9 Plug Not Used 10 Plug DC/DC Converter Temperature HCM 11 DC/DC Converter 3 18 TXL Not Used 12 Plug ECA Ignition HCM 13 ECA H 18 TXL Not Used 14 Plug Not Used 15 Plug Not Used 16 Plug Service Battery Plus 17 Service Port A 18 TXL Not Used 18 Plug DC/DC Converter Feedback Voltage HCM 19 DC/DC Converter 1 18 TXL Not Used 20 Plug Not Used 21 Plug Not Used 22 Plug Not used 23 Plug Not Used 24 Plug Service Ignition HCM 25 Service Port C 18 TXL Battery Cooling Fan Relay Plus HCM 26 Battery Cooling Fan 86 18 TXL Not Used 27 Plug APG Enable HCM 28 APG C 18 TXL Not Used 29 Plug Not Used 30 Plug Service Battery Minus HCM 31 Service Port B 18 TXL Coolant Pump Relay Plus HCM 32 Coolant Pump Relay 86 18 TXL High-Voltage Relay Plus HCM 33 High-Voltage Relay 3 18 TXL PTO Power Plus HCM 34 PTO 18 TXL 442 Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins Connector Pin Description Heat Exchanger Plus HCM 35 HEF Relay 86 12 GXL or 14SXL Not Used 36 Plug Heat Exchanger Minus HCM 37 HEF Relay 85 18 TXL Not Used 38 Plug Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG 443 Connector Pin Description Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins Push Button Shift Control Connector Push Button 30-Way Connector Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG HIL High PBSC F1 TECU 28 18 HIL Low PBSC F2 TECU 27 18 Shift Control Power Minus PBSC J3 TECU 25 18 Shift Control Power Plus PBSC C1 TECU 31 18 Vdash PBSC B3 TECU Spliced 18 27 28 25 31 Terminal Side - Harness Connector Transmission ECU Connector (Vehicle Interface) J1 Dimmer control input Push Button Shift Control Push Button Shift Control Delphi 30-way connector C2 F2 F1J3 C1 B3 Bulkhead connector located at firewall Terminal Side - Harness Connector Push Button Shift Control (Delphi 30-Way Connector) Transmission ECU Connector (Vehicle Interface) Back side of gauges Dash lights 37 38 35 36 1 6 7 12 13 22 23 28 29 34 A B C D E F G H J K 1 2 3 A1 A3 K1 K3 444 Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins Connector Pin Description Inverter Connectors Inverter 40-Way Connector Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG Relay Off (0) Inverter 3 Chassis Gnd 16 TXL CAN High 1 Inverter 4 HEV Backbone A 16 TXL CAN Low 1 Inverter 5 HEV Backbone B 16 TXL GND1 Inverter 6 Chassis Gnd 16 TXL GND2 Inverter 7 Chassis Gnd 16 TXL V-Batt1 (24V) Inverter 9 PEC 2 16 TXL V-Batt2 (24V) Inverter 10 PEC 2 16 TXL Relay Off Inverter 13 PEC 5 16 TXL Relay Box Enable 1 Inverter 14 PEC 6 16 TXL GND (BC1) Inverter 15 PEC 7 16 TXL REZGS1 Inverter 18 Resolver Ground Shield 1 16 TXL REZGS2 Inverter 19 Resolver Ground Shield 2 16 TXL REZGR Inverter 20 Resolver Ground R Shield 16 TXL PRECHRG (+) Inverter 21 PEC 17 16 TXL Main (+) (+) Inverter 22 PEC 9 16 TXL Main (-) (+) Inverter 23 PEC 13 16 TXL Relay Box Enable 2 Inverter 24 PEC 6 16 TXL GND (BC2) Inverter 25 PEC 7 16 TXL TM_S Inverter 26 Temp Sensor Shield 16 TXL REZS1 Inverter 28 Resolver 2 16 TXL REZS2 Inverter 29 Resolver 6 16 TXL Z DETAIL Z SCALE 1/1 A: Phase U C: Phase W B: Phase V High-Voltage AC Amphenol Connector Deutsch 40-way Connector High-Voltage DC Yazaki Connector DC( - ) DC( + ) Breather Mounting Bracket Capscrews (2 x M5) 1 15 5 6 10 20 30 40 26 36 35 25 31 21 11 16 Ground Strap Bracket Deutsch 40-way Connector 445 Connector Pin Description Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins REZ_Plus Inverter 30 Resolver 4 16 TXL PRECHRG (-) Inverter 31 PEC 19 16 TXL Main (+) (-) Inverter 32 PEC 11 16 TXL Main (-) (-) Inverter 33 PEC 15 16 TXL CAN High 2 Inverter 34 PEC 1 16 TXL CAN-Low 2 Inverter 35 PEC 2 16 TXL TMGND Inverter 36 Temp Sensor 2 16 TXL TM Inverter 37 Temp Sensor 1 16 TXL REZS3 Inverter 38 Resolver 1 16 TXL REZS4 Inverter 39 Resolver 5 16 TXL REZ_Minus Inverter 40 Resolver 3 16 TXL Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG 446 Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins Connector Pin Description Power Electronics Carrier (PEC) Connectors 19-way Connector Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG CAN High PEC 1 Inverter 14 18 CAN Low PEC 2 Inverter 28 18 Mating Connector View (Deutsch 19 - Way) 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 High Voltage DC Connector 1 to Inverter (Yazaki Connector) High Voltage DC Connector 2 to APG (Yazaki Connector) High Voltage DC Connector 3 to DCDC (Yazaki Connector) Low Voltage Deutsch 19 - Way Connector Caution: The PEC 19-way low-voltage connector needs to have the back shell and strain relief such that the unit will not allow water entry from direct spray. 447 Connector Pin Description Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins HV Relay (+) PEC 3 HCM 33 18 HV Relay (-) PEC 4 HCM 5 18 RelayOff PEC 5 Inverter 43 18 BCU (+) PEC 6 Inverter 16 18 BCU (-) PEC 7 Inverter 34 18 Main (+) + PEC 9 Inverter 30 18 Main (+) - PEC 11 Inverter 35 18 Main (-) + PEC 13 Inverter 31 18 Main (-) - PEC 15 Inverter 36 18 PreChg + PEC 17 Inverter 29 18 PreChg - PEC 19 Inverter 37 18 Battery Fan Plus PEC 12 Battery Fan Cooling Relay 87 12 Battery Fan Minus PEC 14 Battery Negative - 12 Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG 448 Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins Connector Pin Description PEC High-Voltage (DC) Connector to Inverter PEC High-Voltage (DC) Connector to DC/DC Converter Inverter High-Voltage (AC) Connector Inverter High-Voltage (DC) Connector Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG DC + PEC A Inverter A 15mm DC - PEC B Inverter B 15mm Loose Disconnect PEC 1 PEC 2 0.8 mm (18 AWG) Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG DC + PEC A DC/DC Converter A 14 AWG DC - PEC B DC/DC Converter B 14 AWG Loose Disconnect PEC 1 DC/DC Converter 1 0.8 mm (18 AWG) Loose Disconnect PEC 2 DC/DC Converter 2 0.8 mm (18 AWG) Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG Phase 1 Inverter A Motor/Gen A 4 AWG Phase 2 Inverter B Motor/Gen B 4 AWG Phase 3 Inverter C Motor/Gen C 4 AWG Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG DC + Inverter A PEC A 15mm DC - Inverter B PEC B 15mm Loose Disconnect Inverter 1 Inverter 2 0.8 mm (18 AWG) 449 Connector Pin Description Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins Electric Clutch Actuator (ECA) Connectors ECA 3-Way Connector ECA 8-Way Connector Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG Ignition ECA A Not Used Plug Battery Minus ECA B Chassis Ground Battery - 12 Battery Plus ECA C Fused 50 amp from Vbatt Battery + 12 Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG CAN High ECA A CAN Backbone A 18 CAN Low ECA B CAN Backbone B 18 CAN - Pass ECA C Not Used Plug Signal ECA D Not Used Plug CAN + Pass ECA E Not Used Plug Engine Flywheel Speed Sensor Plus ECA F Speed Sensor + A 18 Engine Flywheel Speed Sensor Minus ECA G Speed Sensor - B 18 ECA Ignition ECA H HCM 13 18 HCM 28 27 A B A B F
G
F
G
50 AMP fuse Battery power (Non-switched power) run to the Battery Engine Flywheel Speed Sensor (Eaton Supplied) A
B
C
Terminal Side - Harness Connector Metri-Pack 3-Way Connector Terminal Side - Harness Connector Metri-Pack 8-Way Connector 13 E F G H D C B A A B C 450 Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins Connector Pin Description Motor/Generator Connectors Views looking into connectors with wires exiting the opposite side. Terminal Side - Harness Connector Temperature Sensor (Deutsch 2-pin connector) Terminal Side - Harness Connector Resolver (Deutsch 6-pin connector) High Voltage AC Ampenol Connector Temperature Sensor Connector Low Voltage Deutsch Resolver Connector Low Voltage Deutsch Bottom View Ground Strap Bracket Ground Strap 451 Connector Pin Description Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins Motor/Generator Resolver Connector Motor/Generator Temperature Sensor Connector Motor/Generator High-Voltage (AC) Connector Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG Resolver Signal 3 Motor/Gen 1 EPS Inverter 38 18 Resolver Signal 2 Motor/Gen 2 EPS Inverter 28 18 Resolver Signal 1 Motor/Gen 3 EPS Inverter 40 Plug Resolver Signal 4 Motor/Gen 4 EPS Inverter 30 Plug Resolver - Motor/Gen 5 EPS Inverter 39 Plug Resolver + Motor/Gen 6 EPS Inverter 29 18 Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG Motor Temp Motor/Gen 1 EPS Inverter 37 18 Motor Temp Gnd Motor/Gen 2 EPS Inverter 36 18 Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG Phase 1 Motor/Gen U Inverter U 4 AWG Phase 2 Motor/Gen V Inverter V 4 AWG Phase 3 Motor/Gen W Inverter W 4 AWG 452 Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins Connector Pin Description Typical DC/DC Converter Circuit Remove the 24-volt battery cables prior to working on the DC/DC converter. DC(-) DC(+) 24V DC(+) 24V DC(-) High Voltage DC Yazaki Connector OEM Connection Deutsch 4-Way OEM Connector 453 Connector Pin Description Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins DC/DC Converter 4-Way Deutsch OEM Connector Converter High-Voltage (DC) Connector Converter 24-volt Studs Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG Ground DC/DC 4 Ground 18 Thermocouple DC/DC 3 HCM 11 18 Not Used DC/DC 2 Not Used Plug Voltage Feedback DC/DC 1 HCM 19 18 Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG DC + DC/DC A PEC A 14 DC - DC/DC B PEC B 14 Loose Disconnect DC/DC 1 PEC 1 18 Loose Disconnect DC/DC 2 PEC 2 18 Description From Pin # To Pin # AWG 24volt + DC/DC A Battery Positive Post A 2 24volt - DC/DC B Battery Negative Post B 2 454 Hybrid and Transmission Connector Pins Connector Pin Description www.eaton.com/greensolutions Copyright Eaton Corporation, 2012. Eaton hereby grant their customers, vendors, or distributors permission to freely copy, reproduce and/or distribute this document in printed format. It may be copied only in its entirety without any changes or modications. THIS INFORMATION IS NOT INTENDED FOR SALE OR RESALE, AND THIS NOTICE MUST REMAIN ON ALL COPIES. Note: Features and specications listed in this document are subject to change without notice and represent the maximum capabilities of the software and products with all options installed. Although every attempt has been made to ensure the accuracy of information contained within, Eaton makes no representation about the completeness, correctness or accuracy and assumes no responsibility for any errors or omissions. Features and functionality may vary depending on selected options.
For specing or service assistance, call 1-800-826-HELP (4357) or visit www.eaton.com/roadranger. In Mexico, call 001-800-826-4357.
Eaton Corporation Vehicle Group P.O. Box 4013 Kalamazoo, MI 49003 USA 800-826-HELP (4357) www.eaton.com/roadranger Printed in USA Roadranger: Eaton and trusted partners providing the best products and services in the industry, ensuring more time on the road.